Home

Engelsk komplett manual

1. 65 Kick38 66 Kick27 67 Kick43 68 Snare009 69 Snare010 71 Snare012 73 Snare016 76 Snare034 77 Snare033 78 Snare056 79 Snare023 80 Snare024 81 Snare021 82 Snare029 83 Snare030 36 Kick01 84 Snare070 Drum Set 37 Kick02 85 Snare071 38 Kick03 86 Snare072 39 Kick04 87 Snare058 40 Kick05 88 Snare031 41 Kick06 89 Snare073 90 Snare060 92 Snare075 45 Kick13 93 Snare036 46 Kick08 94 Snare035 96 SnareO11 97 Snare051 50 Kick29 98 Snare052 99 Snare059 52 Kick30 100 Snare061 53 Kick31 101 Snare076 54 Kick35 02 Snare019 03 Snare032 56 Kick32 04 Snare020 57 Kick19 05 Snare050 58 Kick25 06 Snare068 59 Kick09 07 Snare069 60 Kick51 08 Snare045 61 Kick36 09 Snare046 Jazz Brush Program Change 80 14 Snare001 62 Conga Slap 15 RollO1 63 Conga_Hi 16 RollO2 Ja 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom FlamO1 70 Maracas01 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleO1 24 Crash01 72 WhistleO2 73 Guiro01 74 Guiro02 75 Claves01 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica01 31 SticksO1 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleO1 Lesch Lesch Lesch Lesch Iesch O D O O 5 2 Ry O 33 Metronome 01 81 Triangled2 82 Shaker01 35 Kick06 83 Shaker02 36 Kick13 84 SticksO2 37 RimshotO02 85 Castagnet 38 Snare043 86 Tambourined2 39 Snare024 87 RimshotO05 88 Snare026 41 Tom13 89 Snare043 90 S
2. J volumes modes and switches 0 1 127 Master volume Main e modes and EE sss sisse eiessersmu the whole system output Vocalizer mode 0 MIDI Mode 5 harmony voices driven by MIDI messages sent through the harmony channel 1 Auto Chord Mode no note on off decoded whatever the midi channel is The vocalizer detects the note sung into the microphone and computes the notes up to 5 to be synthesized automatically according to a harmony table This table indicates the transposition amount of each virtual voice in semitones depending on the detected note 96 preset tables are available and can be simply called by NRPN 96 18 See this NRPN for the list of the presets When such a NRPN is sent the preset table overwrites the current one In addition to these presets you can program your own table and download it into the vocalizer with a System Exclusive message See the Sysex part for additional information Lead voice switch 0 off muted 1 127 on Lead channel processing switch 0 off Pitch correction and Voice transform blocks see synoptic are bypassed NRPNs 97 02 to 97 11 have no effect 1 127 on full lead channel processing mode Harmony switch 0 off muted 1 127 on 9696 07 10 MIDI track transpose 2 1 0 1 2 data MSB 0 to 4 octaves or automatic data MSB 5 Allow the MIDI notes messages to be transposed in octave increment
3. S e L A E EI d mp Gao 8mm SR we pem inu L z 2 amp Los oe ikp See E m T i i e m gt mm a T E x a wu mm ez dom idm Bh e EE i ME WM Le i 7 k i aT E 1 I neBaRTENAdu T USB connection USB connection to a computer USB DEVICE 0 mW Hi j F m ERIS d Ee Gi m e E uu x a ek amm fan m Li j BI P zeen G k 1 a guis mcm uum mpomome m d ke B amp E dm x ikp Loc Sete E m P m4 GE ERST n NN a Gw il cf E e p z e e d Bm gd bs OS WE EE FS s e HHHH noc dui K m vai Tra em EusBnNATNAA COU 10 KETRON e AUDYA Lab Os cea ib reent Quan er dE UNCLE pm Yo Sade TR BARCA a DU a DR HI ano CHO Pe vote PM A e G EUR PEP e pg COMPUTER CONNECTED VIA USB Connections B USB ti edure connection procedur KETRON 1 Connect the USB cable to the USB DEVICE port ge pg of Audya and to the USB port of a computer 2 After a while USB connected will appear on the gu uU display of Audya Figure A All the functions on B the front panel are disabled a 4 Aa 3 After awhile a screen like Figure B should JE wich appear on the screen of your computer From this o windows you should choose the Open folder to a Na 5 view files using Windows Explorer option Figure Eege D BS B e PR Anyway you will be able to open Audya
4. i o SG o Bg ei Je HI Bi je DCH ao KS 60000008 Eden 69 KETRON e AUDYA 3 7 Program VOICE EDIT Press the USER 1 button to access the edit page of each VOICE of the PROGRAM You will see a screen similar to Figure 70 where all the parameters of the VOICE of the PROGRAM will appear By using the F1 to F10 buttons you can select a parameter and modify the value using the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons Press the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together to set the default value 32 e F1 ATTACK modifies the attack time of the envelope Values from 0 to 63 default 32 Figure 71 e F2 DECAY modifies the decay time of the envelope Values from 0 to 63 default 32 e F3 SUSTAIN modifies the sustain time of the envelope Values from 0 to 63 default 32 e F4 RELEASE modifies the release time of the envelope Values from 0 to 63 default 32 e F5 LEVEL modifies the envelope level Values from 26 to 63 default 32 e F6 RESONANCE modifies the resonance level Values from 0 to 63 default 32 e F7 CUTOFF modifies the cutoff frequency Values from 0 to 63 default 32 e F8 DCA OFFSET modifies the OFFSET of the DCA Digital Controlled Amplifier envelope In other words it raises lowers the influence on the amplifier Values from 0 to 63 default 32 e F9 DCF OFFSET modifies the OFFSET of the DCF Digital Controlled Filter envelope In other words it raises
5. u Des amo amp kErBcAAD CONTROL ex EE CCRT Ai LE D Mae DEO Bi LU fi ee rum ircwuPH M m 20 z z J J z Figure 35 s s s z Figure 36 S R71 FF SIE HI E 205 Pe nni m reer to conma ELM ques rt ao mn wm Wu IP bei Ir Let Pai SES a0 eO ms CH mn nm amp nm pum 6 Ges Lee E Mij z z z z z Fisura sb EE Utj Ll l m VC SE SES B ai oles uum ao z z z z z LI Figure 39 Autoswitch Time Strictly pertaining to the new MAIN VIEW interface the AUTOSWITCH TIME function allows to set the switching time up to 60 seconds before the MAIN VIEW switches from other environments For example after you choose a style or an instrument the display switch automatically to the MAIN VIEW after the AUTOSWITCH TIME set by this parameter B Setting the AUTOSWITCH TIME 1 Press the MENU button on the front panel to open the MENU screen 2 Press the F4 button corresponding to KEYBOARD CONTROL 3 Pressthe F10 button corresponding to UTILITY 4 Press the USER 5 button NEXT PAGE 5 Press the F7 button to select AUTOSWITCH TIME sec as shown in Figure 40 6 Now you can ulf the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR gt buttons to set the value in seconds from 1 to 60 seconds as shown in Figure 41 7 Please set a time value between 3 and 5 seconds even if you can set a higher value 8 Press the EXIT button to go to the previous w
6. Press one of the F1 F10 buttons to select one of the ten displayed styles In the example the F3 button selects the FUSION_FUNK style Figure a a fr 11 0 KE EI KE KI vey 3 Press the CURSOR lt 4 gt to select further pages e n E vn nmm of STYLE containing ten styles each Figure 12 Figure 11 Note that you can access more than two pages for each style family LE TALAD TRAG FAHI Pad id rs E corel Tel J k A Sgr LA an pg 0 LJ Si A LOUNGE LA MBE BALLAD 1 a A BER EI JA RAB EALLAD 2 o p g A SUFRE lA SHOOTHLFUMK t 7 poet Gesten es OC Poi ER a3 33 E a DS uds Det Ltregg i aij By turning the wheel clockwise counter clockwise you can scroll the pages just like the CURSOR a gt Also you can scroll the pages by pressing repeatedly the same STYLE family button e g BALLAD POP and so on 900005 Figure 12 Note that the styles which contain an audio part AUDIO DRUM GROOVES LIVE GUITAR have the symbol before the style name KETRON e AUDYA 17 Play Control Play Control The PLAY CONTROL section contains all the control functions so you can start playing the keyboard and modify the settings accordingly to your own way of playing AFTER DRUM 4 PORTAMENTO TOUCH DRUM SET MIXER GM PART OCTAVE A MANUAL TOLOWEST BASSIST MODE VIEW LEFT USER W SLOW FAST SPLIT PIANIST VOICE ASSIGNABLE L MIDI RESET B TRANSPOSER
7. pe mee La MER md Kee e Te 1 EI Ei EI a DEUS ban re 5600000 pons 289 206658 Figure 287 EI ES Ir a RI BC ei Je B0 Ino IQ JM u bim Le a NEW MIDI REMIX FEATURES e Two options for MIDI REMIX storing have been added F1 START BAR F2 STOP BAR e Start Bar and Stop Bar Figure 290 indicate the start bar of the MIDI REMIX and the stop bar respectively e Please note that if the Start Bar is not 1 the drum of the MIDI file will play during the bars before the Start Bar In the same way if the Stop Bar value is set more than the total number of bars of the MIDI file when the MIDI REMIX ends the drum of the MIDI file will still play STYLE AND MIDI BUTTONS The STYLE and MIDI buttons in the User Style Disk Area section are now implemented Figure 291 While the REMIX is running these buttons enable disable the REMIX using the style e You can store the changes of the Arranger Fill Break Style and MIDI In this way when the next REMIX start again these changes will apply automatically e While you are making a MIDI REMIX press the HECORD button to store the changes s All the changes will be stored into the MIDI file e To save them definitely into the MIDI file press SAVE while the MIDI REMIX is running while the RECORD button is lit e You can also make a REMIX by using the MIDI file already playing Just activate the REMIX
8. 88 BALLENATO i Co NO co n LA v gt JJ Se lt U O A gt 3 PARTY POLKA 23 POLKA1 38 POLKA4 39 POLKA5 5 POP POP 2 06 POP4 16 R amp BLUES 3 I U U OJO rr l gt gt N U O A gt C2 INN IIIA N NIO O A gt JI O Gei ev U O m A gt Oi v O v u v COOC lh a A Co O c cdq nmj mi pereo 1 NO 3 33 w o U LI m ri OD COOC CO COIN O X O O A AR 11 2 o sed Eed CHEN LO O Q Jojo N 37 O1 E E L L 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 D 8 H O R amp BLU R amp BLU R amp ROL R amp ROL REGGA REGGA ROCK ROCK ROCK ROCK ROCK ROCK ROCK ROCK ROCK ROCK ROCK ROCK ROCK ROCK RUMBA RUMBA RUMBA RUMBA 31 32 RUMBA MKI 33 RUMBA MKCZ samsa JAZZ SHUFFLE N c lt UJ gt ES Ke 1 2 2 1 2 CO ZU C lt UJ gt Ke NO CD gt lt UJ gt c D N N S S 1 E E 0 1 2 3 5 1 2 3 4 co coco I I I OJOJO 2312 gjaja ORE GIS A 20 4 4 N sch O PISI gt e 3E O JJ TI O A NO N Live Guitar 103 SHUFFLE 4 118 SHUFFLE 5 9 SHUFFLEG NO 43 44 45 7 9 SLOW ROCK 1 5 SLOW ROCK 2 6 SLOW ROCK
9. TANGO ITALIANO TARANTELLA 3 8 2 5 6 7 8 9 io 12 3 LM 15 16 18 19 22 23 esch N O OO COIN Oso AUDYA FACTORY STYLES gt S TYLE BALADA R o R 4 CUBAN_CHACHA R CUMBIA R R Co CUMBION DISCO SAMBA DOMINICANA FAST BOSSA LATIN JAZZ Ke WININININININININININJ gt I N 0 rGoib l A O doj o OojO1 Co O CO NIOJ on amp hm oO RUMBA BEGUINE RUMBA_BEGUINE 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 N STYLE 6 PASO DOBLE 8 QUEBEC FOLKLORE REELS N STYLE 6 ROCKING 8 SHUFFLE 9 SLOW BLUES Styles PARTY STYLE BOARISCHER esch BOARISCHER CHLAGER WALZER S SCHLAGERGRIECH SLOW ROCK 6 8 PATZEN BEAT S SUMMER REGGAE 30 TANZ PALAST O Co 6 8 9 30 KETRON 0 AUDYA 131 Styles AUDYA FACTORY STYLES STYLE 3 ACOUSTIC_GROOVE 4 ACOUSTIC POP 5 BRIT POP 20 OLD SCHOOL SOULFUL E mm LA wm d SOUL FU LD O TREND_POP TRIPLET POP 8 2 5 6 7 8 9 1o UN 2 13 C 15 18 i7 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 91 32 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 0 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 13
10. 2 2 2 3 4 3 7 8 9 3 5 O G G S S S C C C C C C 35 CLAP 2 228 230 37 CLAP 1 G 228 9 CONGA G O O Z C gt NO CONGA CONGA 3T 31 CONGAST AN OJO OJO zz C C gt gt OI SIE _A B T HA B D E F T T T B A C NIN OI N o CONGA BOLERO a CONGA BOLERO 43 CONGA CHAT za CONGA CHA2 7 45 CONGA MAMBO 49 CONGA SALSA 51 CONGA SALSAS 7 NO O CO LO 0 O1 O1 KRY RIA B C5 N O N NIO O1 NO N O gt Z O m Co eo o6 68 o o e o 99 03 208 i O esch wesch Co esch NO NO O NO Groove Drum 2 4 FLAMENCOF z7 arsy GUAJRAB H6 GUIRA1 er eurae anren a Hime HIPHOPt 3 HOUSES o4 Houses 05 HOUSE7 os Houses 20 HOUSE Kick5B 223 HOUSE Kick7A 7 JJAZZROCK A C1 NIN NINJ N NIO O1 gt c OO CO CO OO CO CO CO CO OJO or gt Oo 4 CH O MPM MMM MINM N gt gt gt sch a sch sch sch Ma eS O c o o o 55 co NO RS NO NO O EH NO D KETRON 0 AUDYA 125 Groove Drum 2 Groove Bank Drum 2 C AZZROCK B e c 0 ATINDANCE1 11 NO CO esch N co ce MARACAS 2 T N CO o O
11. AMMURR1 124 sesch sesch wesch NINININ Co Oo 1 O TANGO2 123 31 TANGO 116 32 TECHNO 128 56 TWISTRX 174 DO ms mA P MO P o m 2 o 28 TWIST i74 33 URBAN 136 94 URBAN2 105 23 VILLERA 88 34 WALTZ 183 57 WESTERNIRX 115 WESTERNS 100 80 WESTERNA 115 NO CO NO C2 C2 esch Co Co rri ge m SS Z Co o 5 N CO INDIA rri ge m SS Z D on 22 WIENER 176 C2 The RX after the file name of the AUDIO DRUM stands for remixed that is the remixed version of the same file with the same name while FX stands for effects that is the original version with some effects applied like compressor reverb etc Groove Bank Drum 2 o BATUCADA A BLUEGRASS 25 BONGO 1T O Ajo UJ TT c m G JI gt CO Ge sech sch sch lech N OIAIOINI C1 Nh mg NO DA DA A Ke E BONGO BOLERO BONGO BOLERO2 BONGO C 21 2 BOSSA_A 23 BOSSA B BOSSA C 2 d 3 6 C C H H H BONGO SALSA A A 4 A Z H H H H H H No OoOjdvc o o BRUSH 1 T 25 BRUSH FAST 6 BRUSH MEDIUM BRUSH SLOW l NO O BRUSH_SLOW2 BRUSH_SLOW3 0 A O O O BRUSH SLOW4 CABAZA A A A A A A Co g O gt UJ gt N gt CO O1 E O D C O Z 1 2
12. J fan 180 KETRON 0 AUDYA 69 Drum Mixer 9 10 By using the DATA VALUE wheel select kick15 Next to the name of the slot an asterisk will appear In our example you will hear the kick playing an electronic sound Figure 181 Press F1 once more to move on the selection of the family of the Drum part so you can navigate between different families Press F1 once more to deselect Repeat the same procedure for the snare see below Snare remapping 1 zd 6 Press F2 and the Eb1 key on the keyboard Figure 182 Select snare015 by using the DATA VALUE wheel Figure 183 Press F2 twice to deselect Press F3 to select a new Drum Remap bank Press the D1 note and select snare014 by using the DATA VALUE wheel Press F3 twice to deselect Hi Hat remapping 1 2 Same procedure for the Hi Hat Press F4 and the F 1 key on the keyboard Select stick09 by using the DATA VALUE wheel Storing the Drum Remap 1 At this point the style is modified You can go on by using the same procedure to remap all the drum sounds as you like Once you are satisfied press the SAVE button on the front panel give a new name to the User style and press the USER 5 button SAVE to store the changes Figure 184 ZU KETRON e AUDYA SE FS D i ZW Sa Sje E 80 Heje e YAA Si be ES wm B ou A wo own Nanc ME d a o00gOoOO0gocooO Figure 181 xls
13. OCTAVE values 2 1 0 1 2 auto MIDI MODE values ON OFF in this mode the VOCODER is active for the MIDI melody track EO a ee VOICES EDIT z z Y d z z g By pressing the F7 button the list of VOICES EDIT Figure 312 parameters similar to Figure 313 will appear Here you can edit the harmonization parameters up to 5 voices Select a vertiacal parameter by using the CURSOR A Y buttons and the horizontal parameter by using the CURSOR a gt buttons Modify the value of each selected parameter of the 5 voices VOICES from 1 to 5 by using the DATA VALUE wheel Go B QU 785 OO Gen 22 eee er Em mum E CUTOFF values 0 38 OY ti D RESONANCE values 0 7 0999590990 Figure 313 KETRON e AUDYA 109 Voicetron EQUALIZER By pressing the F8 button the list of EQUALIZER effects similar to Figure 314 will appear from which you can choose one of the 10 bands graphical equalizer preset by using the USER buttons from 1 to 5 or edit the parameters to set the custom equalization Select one of the 10 EQ bands by using the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons Modify the value of the selected band by using the CURSOR A YW buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel values from 14 dB to14 dB The USER buttons from 1 to 5 allow to choose one of the following Preset e Flat no equalization LowCut equalization with bass frequencies cut HighCut equalization with high frequencies cut Loudness bas
14. AUDYA advanced music station m D TELT eee ee A P E s umm A Il LZ BN tis mi SS ou ENEBSSERNEZOBEL iN Cd nir i mm mm KETRON IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS A A CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN A A The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance Servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance This appliance has a serial number located on the rear panel Please record the model name and the serial number and retain them for your records WARNING TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE Model name Serial number CE Marking Information a Applicable electromagnetic environment E4 b Peak inrush current 15 A Read these instructions 11 Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer 2 Keep these instructions 3 Heda 12 Use only b
15. JJ O O A Qo JI O IR Co CH 7 J J D JIJ OIOIOIOIOJO OIOIOIOIOIO Al AIAIALA A Co Co rno ro mo gt lt ro 9X S lt WC OU aT NO NO N O1 e D O CH A JI JJ Ke M Oi RNB1 88 JJ JJ OJO OIO A A OY D Geif lo hi NO 7 JJ J OJO OIO A IA Oo Oi AT n Aa lm nO CH 1 1 D O O A O N 4 3 SALSA1 90 ALSA2 98 ALSA3 90 106 SAMBA1 124 107 108 112 113 163 SHUFFLE3RX125 114 250 168 169 70 SLOW3 90 18 SL ROCKIFX 65 ZU Q QO A N J Ke CO D O O A N Co 15 JJ 2J9 20 COOC OJOJOO AAA CO Oo uid Eia X o N oloja O1 5 2 3 4 6 7 8 2 0 1 0 2 1 1 6 2 3 4 5 6 4 8 JJ O O Ee gt UD lt JJ a e LP ZU 2 26 26 26 29 29 29 10 24 16 16 10 16 10 24 16 24 17 24 2 24 2 24 24 19 24 10 NJN 104 105 VINJO CD 109 249 NJN 110 220 324 111 INJINI CD QD 115 116 OI 195 216 W NO 51 SL ROCKIRX 65 L ROCK2 51 i N NI O01 5 NIO S S SL ROCK3RX 70 SL ROCK3 70 S S 2 L ROCKA 165 L ROCK5 150 i2 SL ROCK6 100 17 SL ROCK7 66 3 SOULI 04 S SOUL3 94 S S Co a ND Nh Or ch IM zk 1c O SE NO PO O1 E P URFRX 170 sch N sch ONION Oo O1 O1 amp URF 170 9 SWING4 160 30 SWINGS 200
16. LxWxH 114 cm x 43 cm x 15 cm 45 x 17 x 6 18 5 Kg 38 Ibs IEEE T m l KETRON 0 AUDYA 159 Notes Due to continuing product improvement efforts specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice Please visit frequently our website www ketron it to check for software updates user manuals etc 160 KETRON e AUDYA KETRON e AUDYA 161 AUDYA advanced music station KETRON s r l Via Giuseppe Taliercio n 7 60131 Ancona Italy Tel 39 071 285771 Tel 39 071 2857748 www ketron it email ketron ketron it Printed in Italy
17. The buttons of the ARRANGER CONDUCTOR section allow real time control of the styles when the Arranger mode is selected See the PLAY CONTROL settings to select the desired Arranger mode on page 18 Display and function buttons INTRO ENDING 1 d A From left to right here are the descriptions for each button INTRO ENDING 123 When the Arranger is stopped by pressing one of these three buttons you can enable one of the three introductions of the style When the Arranger is playing by pressing one of the three buttons you can enable one of the three endings of the style KEY START KEY STOP If button START is on the Arranger will instantly start when you start playing the keyboard If button STOP is on the Arranger will instantly stop when you release all the buttons ABCD Each button corresponds to a style variation FILL IN By pressing this button you can enable one FILL of the selected style and the Arranger will automatically start If the Arranger is already playing by pressing this button you will enable the same FILL KEY START KEYSTOP EEE Hm HEE HM FiLLIN FF HOLD BREAK EN SLOW FAST BREAK By pressing this button you can enable one of the BREAK of the selected style and the Arranger will automatically start If the Arranger is already playing by pressing this button you will enable the same BREAK TEMPO SLOW FAST By pressing these buttons you can slow down
18. Wave 1 2 A Drum MP3 2 SFX MP3 1 Voicetron Drawbars BASS J I go WA Qga B 00o0gOcOOCOCO Figure 266 Os AS El py LCE en pn B g z E C Ges ver OS 6 e E oogocoOgood Figure 267 By means of the chord recognition if Bass To Chord is set to On also the bass section will start the Key Tune Figure 268 Chords By using the CURSOR a gt buttons you can select the source one by one and set the output destination choosing from Main Stereo or Main 3 amp 4 By using the button USER 5 SAVE you can store up to 5 outputs Presets Select a Preset with the F6 F10 buttons and press the USER 5 button SAVE KETRON e AUDYA 95 Out1 amp 2 Drum By using the CURSOR A YW buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel you can select the percussive instrument of the drum to output Figure 269 The percussive instruments are the following o0O0O0O00029 Once selected the percussive instrument you can set Wi the output with the CURSOR lt 4 gt gt buttons choosing uJ between Main Stereo or 1 amp 2 Stereo p iia Out1 amp 2 m By using the CURSOR A Y buttons or the DATA Di VALUE wheel you can select the internal source to E send to the output 1 and 2 Figure 270 The internal Du Oo Qoo Ju sources are the following Figure 270 cau e BC Once selected the source you can set the output Sa zer a0 destination wi
19. and numbers for easy input of names when saving files on the hard disk and for a quick file search KETRON e AUDYA Connections AUDIO connections Stereo jack connection to a PA system LINE INPUT 1 and 2 ECH MAIN OUT L R e PO E E T m BEE e im El BE e AMPLIFIED SPEAKERS LINE INPUT 1 2 3 and 4 GC MAIN OUT L R INPUT L INPUT R GEES Ee CSS analki ua s ASR rs ER i 4 mm Hero erg AMPLIFIED SPEAKERS 8 KETRON e AUDYA Connections Connecting one or two microphones and one headphones MICRO 2 STEREO HEADPHONES AL dat E E H ewen w P Sse i o D ak gt A j P dod modum 2 a l E E 3 a een e W n su A Wu i SAANA WA Ae cd d 7 d MIDI connection MIDI connection to an external interface connected to a computer AUDIO MIDI USB INTERFACE or FIREWIRE MIDI OUT MIDI IN DP TTT TT OKE SS ES z 3 dk a D bob o B ams d EU ee PE Rm 0 M i d OH m dm be d D ES L Lad ke EusBuWENNASWIA Ae ef J Tila COMPUTER WITH A DAW APPLICATION Cubase Pro Tools SONAR Logic Reaper Live Reason Fruity Loops Sequel etc KETRON 0 AUDYA 9 Connections VIDEO connection Connecting a VGA monitor VGA MONITOR VIDEO PORT j F mom at D a b D i mca ji eo ee T m a i UN
20. e F7 CH2 e F8 CH3 e F9 CH4 e F10 CH 5 The four buttons from USER 1 to USER 4 allow to access to the corresponding edit windows VOICE EFFECT PAN MUTE B VOICE USER 1 By pressing VOICE default selection you can set an instrument for each part of the style by using the DATA VALUE wheel By using the CURSOR a gt buttons you can raise or lower the volume of the part from 0 to 63 By pressing the CURSOR a gt buttons together you set the volume of the part to 0 By using the OCTAVE buttons you can change the octave of the LOW 1 and LOW 2 parts by 48 semitones 12 semitones steps Figure 127 m EFFECT USER 2 By pressing EFFECT you can select and edit the type and the amount of the effect for each part Figure 128 The multieffect unit allows the use of four effects simultaneously that is a type of the effect for all the voices Please note that the effects Chorus and Reverb are available for the drum and percussion parts DRUM1 and DRUM2 and or Audio Drum and Groove Bank Style View I Ce A SAULT LJ rr E PAATY hn 2 GC ek Cae h a A pi A patra CZU pee wem MA Cm diba Nec 4 amp S oQuuuuuuu Ponga nir a0 Qu ke Qu Nati XE oe uU OB a us By se IW g E sut d u a 5 Dn mum CH Em LUCR e em LJ A pn e E s z g s z CJ Figure 126 z j Qu Sele LS m _ CALPE MODE Ciceros arit LJ D Fong to
21. sce en oe 8 Byusing the F1 F10 buttons select to which HRZ ee meme w BT button you want to assign the SINGLE REGISTRATION a A d 9 Select the SINGLE REGISTRATION by using the i 5 ON EH E OH OH CH DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR A V e nm c wm 10 Press the ENTER button in order to confirm the Figure 109 SINGLE REGISTRATION assigned to any F1 F10 button 11 Repeat the operation for each F1 F10 button KETRON e AUDYA 47 To jump to the second page press the BACK or FORWARD buttons below the display lf you want to replace or delete one SINGLE REGISTRATION select it by using the F1 F10 buttons and press the USER 2 button REPLACE or USER 3 button DELETE respectively and then the ENTER button Press the SAVE button and give a name to the REGISTRATION BLOCK Digit a name in the text box by inputting the characters directly from the keyboard Once the REGISTRATION BLOCK is saved you can recall it from the list by using the CURSOR A V or the DATA VALUE wheel and by pressing the ENTER button Figure 111 By using the F1 F10 buttons you recall the corresponding SINGLE REGISTRATION By using USER 1 button you can enable the SINGLE PLAY or MULTI PLAY functions to play the Registration automatically Recalling a REGISTRATION BLOCK Once a REGISTRATION BLOCK is stored you can recall it from the list on the window by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel Once the file is selected just pr
22. 0 sech CO N MARACAS 5 MARAC BOLERO MARAC BOLERO2 17 MARAC BOLEROS3 18 MARAC BOSSA 19 MARAC CHA 20 MARAC CUMBIA 21 MARAC MERENG 22 MARAC SALSA 23 MARAC SALSA 24 MERENGUE A 25 MERENGUE B 26 MERENGUE C 27 MERENGUE D 28 MERENGUE E MERENGUE F PANDERO1 29 PANDERO2 36 PANDERO 1 T 37 PANDERO 2 T 30 PASODOBLE 3 C1 O 1 A Oo wesch O ech NINJ IOJ 01 gt C2 wesch B ech 2 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 A 41 42 S esch POPFUNK_B POPJAZZ A Big g POPJAZZ C esch wesch O JIGS MARACAS 2T MARACAS s MARAC BOLEROi MARAC BOLERO2 MARAC BOLEROS MARAC BOSSA 7 Manac CHA MARAC CUMBIA MARAC MERENG MARAC SALSA 7 MARAC SALSA2 MERENGUE A MERENGUE B MERENGUE C 7 MERENGUE D MERENGUEE MERENGUEF PANDEROt PANDEROZ PANDERO iT PANDERO 2T PASODOBLE POPFUNKB PORIMZZA POPIAZZ C 777 R amp BLUES B d 126 KETRON e AUDYA NO D D UU id 1112 gt tn a 38 46 a7 RIDE FAST 48 RIDE MEDIUM 49 RIDE SHUFFLE 50 RIDE sLow 51 Rocka s2 Rocke so SALSAA s4 SALSAB 56 57 58 59 60 61 2 63 39 SHAKER 1T 65 SHAKER 2 40 SHAKER 2 T 94 66 SHUFFLE A 67 SHUFFLE B 68 SHUFFLE C ech NO OIII Piri ri gt rir
23. 090899 Figure 167 Sek BER onmino Es Ears P bia C28 ela aw pa fa aye m pe ee ee ee ee S IP FPTIETEFTERENEI LJ g mos i H Bert Cm dedii Figure 168 B UTILITY USER 5 By pressing UTILITY you can access the MIDI utility window Figure 169 Here you can set the following parameters by pressing directly the F1 F10 buttons e F1 SOFT THRU enables the MIDI Thru e F2 MIDI CLOCK IN enables the MIDI clock reception e F3 MIDI CLOCK OUT enables the MIDI clock transmission e FA LOCAL enables the Local On Off function of the keyboard e F5 MIDI PORT IN GM enables the MIDI IN 1 or 2 port for the General MIDI data reception e F6 USB MIDI OUT enables the MIDI transmission on the USB port e F7 GM2 MODE enables the General MIDI 2 mode e F8 GLOBAL GM TX enables the General MIDI global transmission e F9 MIDI IN SEND TO enables the data transmission from the MIDI IN port to the MIDI out 1 or 2 port Storing the changes into the MIDI file 1 From the window GM PARTS when the MIDI file is playing back or paused press the SAVE button on the front panel A dialogue window where to type the file name will appear Figure 170 Give a name to the file by typing letters and numbers directly on the keyboard and then press the USER 5 button SAVE The MIDI file will be saved with the new name or overwritten if you leave the same name The parameters settings to store into the MIDI file can
24. Chill Out txt corresponding to the song Chill Out wav Chill Out txt Figure 337 2 After disconnecting properly the USB connection m pen we wa press the WAVE button to access the WAVE ie a B folder containing the songs 1 D x m L 3 Select the song matching the same TXT file and E w ei start playback by pressing the START button CH LJ C g C s C LJ Figure 338 wa 4 Press F2 LYRIC ON to show the lyric on the Figure 338 display Figure 339 5 When necessary jump to the next page of lyric oo nj by pressing the CURSOR Y button to display the iem Joo aa vir next lyric page Figure 340 Si c eech MJ Oe SES Leg m Synchronizing the lyric auto scroll Cim eus ey st nt namg ers en ati 1 Playback the WAVE file MIDI or MP3 oo Sem 2 Press the RECORD button x 3 Scroll the text pages by pressing the CURSOR V 3 C OOOo0gOQg 5 button as necessary 4 While the file is still running press the SAVE Figure 339 button 5 You will be prompted to save the TXT file 6 Confirm CH UK 7 When you restart the song the displayed lyric will JE Pl iioi rom aa 7 ut change in sync m Umi emo e end pe 5 m STE Ga EE E ac COO ves m BE V a ci G ss mor m I O z z s z v Q Eun 340 KETRON e AUDYA 117 Disk Disk Audya features a bunch of functions dedicated to the disk management B Disk Menu 1 P
25. EES 3 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 NO 90 3rd Perc 91 Click 0 92 B3 Vibrato 98 Slow Motion 94 MazzOrgan Lower 8 4 161 4 Mid Tone Guit CD Sinus _ Fusion Funk Oberbass2 E LU A gei ge Qo O O O D D O D LD o cH Pedal Bass amp Guit2 esch Violin Slow Qo G D Q Marcato Tziago Concert A Chamber Stringss Symphonic Stings3 Digisting strings2 DarkEnsemble Tuh Humming Chori Cornet 2 E ho Choir2 Comet 8 Bright Tone Dixie bone Section Fal Brass 2 Brass 3 Trombone 64 Octabrass N X W D N oO LA 29 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 21 42 43 44 45 EM A7 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 Stops Whaguitar Hawaian Mandolin Ac Folk2 ClassicFx Pedalsteel Vintage Reed Silent M3 Fe Polisynth 15 Sci Fi 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 i i I esch T N Wo 65 Blowd 7 Muted Tpt2 Tenor Brass4 ellow_Tpt 0 e O AE Oilo d Mellow
26. F1 Right F2 Left F3 Bass F4 Lower1 F5 Lower2 F6 Chord1 F7 Chord2 F8 Chord3 F9 Chord4 F10 Chord5 CHANNEL RX same procedure of CHANNEL TX By pressing the F6 button you can access the window where to set the MIDI reception channels for each part Figure 217 Press the F1 button 10 or the CURSOR A W buttons to select the part and assign the MIDI channel from 1 to 16 by using the CURSOR a gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel F1 Right F2 Left F3 Bass FA Drum F5 Drum2 F6 Global global channel of the keyboard F7 Registration F8 Voicetron F9 ARRANGER CHORDS opens another window F10 VOICE DRAWBAR opens another window ARRANGER CHORDS By pressing the F9 button a window will appear where to assign the MIDI reception channels Figure 218 Assign the MIDI channel from 1 to 16 by using the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel F1 Chord1 F2 Chord2 F3 Chord3 F4 Chord4 F5 Chord5 F6 Lower1 F7 Lower2 F8 Live Chord L Mono F9 Live Chord R VOICE DRAWBAR Press the F10 button to open a window like Figure 219 By pressing the F1 F10 buttons or the CURSOR 90009099 e e Geer KiC HK KO Ki Figure 217 a S vis me leen e Om e re uQ a baoo o KA e E pug Mi a EL r2 ag gu B pu ao OGG 0000 Fun dar CIR HI ga a gda 00 H eG Oo oO 50000000 Figure 219 A V buttons you select the parts to which assign the
27. Here you can select the speed of the rotor F1 SLOW F2 FAST The same function is available by using the two SLOW and FAST buttons of the ROTOR section on the front panel DRAWBAR OVERDRIVE By pressing the F6 button on the DSP page you can access the DRAWBAR OVERDRIVE screen as shown in Figure 245 Here you can select the DRAWBAR OVERDRIVE type to set into the DSP to make it available for DRAWBAR 5 Drawbar Overdrive Presets are available Just press one of the F1 F5 buttons to select the corresponding Overdrive type Overdr1 Overdr5 When you activate an Overdrive Preset you can set the option Lock On Off as for the previous effects By pressing the EDIT button on the front panel you can access the parameters of the selected Overdrive Preset as shown in Figure 246 The parameters are identical for all the five Overdrive effects F1 Overdrive choose from 1 to 5 F2 GAIN effect level values 0 127 F3 FILTER LEVEL filter level values 0 63 F4 FILTER FREQ frequency filter cutoff values 0 63 F5 FILTER RESO filter resonance values 0 63 F INPUT GAIN input level values 0 63 F8 OUTPUT LEVEL output level values 0 63 By pressing the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together you set the value to 0 Be careful not to boost the Resonance value of the filter After you set the parameters you can to store the custom Overdrive by pressing the USER 5 button SAVE or the SAVE button on the front panel A brief
28. N sch NINII gt LO esch AN CO esch Bass Bank 26 POP4 35 REGGAETON 2 NO LO CO I esch sch a sch sch ujaji B G G G 1G 1G CO CO IO O x d c oo 1 O Co To O XO sa EID VJJ gt O O l UJ gt E gt Ve No LSA 2 ALSA 3 AMBA 2 AKE UL 1 NGO 4 NGO 6 ANGO 7 WIST 1 ALZ 1 WALZ 2 WALZ 3 WALZ 4 WALZ 5 WALZ 6 WALZ 7 I Ke o E Ke e esch co NO ep o 8 Se gt o ojo SEE co elo o wv ov o COOC I afao D O gt B gt D gt NO gt O C2 O I O Ol O co esch O Co N O N NO das Cu gt Lr N Co N JI 75 KETRON 0 AUDYA 127 Arp amp Lick Arp amp Licks 9 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 2 3 44 16GUIT 6 5 6GUIT 7 6 16GUIT 8 7 16GUIT 9 7 6PIANO 1 8 16PIANO 2 9 16PIANO 3 16PIANO 4 16PIANO 5 16PIANO 6 16PIANO 7 4 16PIANO 8 17 16STRINGS 1 18 16STRINGS 2 19 16STRINGS 3 20 16STRINGS 4 21 16STRINGS 5 22 16STRINGS 6 23 16STRINGS 7 24 16STRINGS 8 25 16STRINGS 9 26 16STRINGS T 1 27 16STRINGS T 2 28 16STRINGS T 3 5 2 ES 60 3 JI dd d d wk EIS EE ERE JEIEIBEIEEIE ZARRA EE ccj ccgcccccgccjgcjcjce ie ed ee aa ai J 8 F i I a I Is IS IS TIS Is olaliklolwloalol o loj
29. O Q oi 3 O F D 5 Q D LO 62 Conga Slap 63 Conga Hi 64 Conga_Low 65 Timbales_Hi 66 Timbales_Lo 67 Agogo Hi 68 Agogo Low 69 Cabasa 70 Maracas01 71 WhistleO1 72 WhistleO2 73 Guiro01 74 Guiro02 5 ClavesO1 6 W_Block_Hi 7 W Block Lo 8 Cuica01 9 Cuica02 O TriangleO1 81 TriangleO2 82 ShakerO1 14 Snare001 15 RollO1 16 Roll02 17 Snare002 18 Snare003 19 Snare004 20 Snare005 21 Snare006 22 Tom FlamO01 23 Tom Flam02 24 CrashO1 25 Snare007 26 Finasnap 01 27 Slap 28 Snare008 29 Scratch Up 30 Scratch Down 31 SticksO1 32 Click 33 Metronome 01 34 Metronome 02 35 Kick15 83 Shaker02 36 Kick17 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshot02 85 Clap04 38 Snare074 86 Tambourine02 39 ClapO3 87 RimshotO1 40 Snare076 88 Snare016 90 Snare064 91 Stick08 96 Applause 97 Belltree 98 Kick26 NIN 58 Vibraslap 59 Ride01 60 Bongo Hi 61 Bongo Low Pop Super Kit Program Change 91 14 Empt 15 Empt 16 Empt 17 Empt 18 Empt 19 Empt 20 Empt 68 Open10 21 Empt 69 TambourineO1 70 Close07 75 Fingsnap02 59Ride09 107 Empt Funk Super Kit Program Change 92 75 Fingsnap02 Drum Set 57 Crash12 58 OpenO8 106 Empt 59 Ride09 60 Maracas01 61 Maracas02 U O D o c CO D A m y O D 3 2 D 2 Q D co CO 62 WhistleO1 63 Whistle02 64 Guiro01 65 Guiro02 66 Open09 67 ClavesO1 68 Open10 69 TambourineO1 70 Close07 71 Clap13 72 Clap12 73 Clap14 74 Clap11 75 Fingsnap02 76 Fingsnap0
30. ONTROL OBH Expression Default 7FH ONTROL 40H ONTROL 41H Portamento On Off On 7FH Off 00H ONTROL 42H ONTROL 43H ONTROL 56H ONTROL DH ONTROL 77H ONTROL 78H ONTROL 79H BnH 79H 00H ONTROL 7BH ONTROL 7EH ONTROL 7FH ONTROL 54H ONTROLSSH BnH 55H oc ONTROL 10H Vocalizer midi mode on ONTROL 11H RPN OOOOH RPN 0001H RPN 0002H RPN 0108H RPN 0109H RPNOTOAH n 63H O1H RPN 0110H RPN OTITH RPN OTT2H RPN 0113 RPN 0120H RPN 0121H RPN 0130H BnH 63H 01H 62H 30H 06H vv FM Amplitudet vv 40H no modify RPN 013TH RPN 0132H RPN 0133H RPN 0163H RPN 0164H RPN 0166H RPN OT6BH RPN 18rrH BnH 63H 18H 62H rr 06H wv Pitch Course of drum instr in semitones rr note vv 40H no modify see note 2 RPN 19rrH BnH 63H 19H 62H rr 06H wv Pitch Fine of drum instr in semitones rr note vv 00h no modify vv 7FH 1 2 tone see note 2 6 RPN 1ArrH BnH 63H 1AH 2H rr 06H vv Level of drum instr note rr vv 00h to 7FH see note 2 RPN 1CrrH BnH 63H 1CH 62H rr 06H vv Pan of drum instr note rr vv 00h to 7FH see note 2 RPN 1DrrH BnH 63H 1DH 62H rr 06H vv Reverb send level of drum instr note rr vv 00h to 7FH see note 2 RPN 1ErrH BnH 63H 1EH 62H rr 06H vv Chorus send level of drum instr note rr vv 00h to 7FH see note 2 Les loco lm 150 KETRON e AUDYA Control Change B Modulation wheel Status Byte 2 Byte 3 BnH 01H mmH n LC 1 or HC 1 lead or harmony MIDI channel mm modulation amount OOH 7FH B Portamento time Statu
31. Plu BE 00 ao Soo Tani Plu ag ao Ino Press the MP3 button Select one MP3 file from the list Press the START button USER 5 Press the START button on the panel the WAVE track stops and you must press START again in order to start playback the MP3 track 8 The MP3 track starts playback and its LED flashes The WAVE track stops and its LED turns off 9 Instead if you press the ENTER button the MP3 track will start playback while the WAVE track is playing The LED of the MP3 track flashes while the LED of the WAVE track lights steadily In this case you should lower manually the volume fader of the WAVE track and raise the volume fader of the MP3 track in order to make a sort of manual crossfade between the two tracks AND pI MIX two WAVE files 1 Press the WAVE button 2 Select an audio file from the WAVE folder 3 Press the ENTER button to start playback 4 Select another audio file from the same WAVE folder Press the ENTER button to start playback Adjust the fader 1 and fader 2 of the Player in order to mix the two audio files TRACK 1 and TRACK 2 in blue colour on the panel D o CROSSFADE If you want to execute an automatic crossfade between the two tracks while playing press the CROSSFADE button on the panel and follow the procedure below CROSSFADE between WAVE and MP3 files 1 Press the WAVE button 2 Select an audio file from the WAVE folder Figure 24 3 P
32. Syste Volurree informations LOS di Cute dara Zr TU ZOUS 14 57 jina Jaf LOSS 4 57 gm 0B TSI ACEL E LL T ALL TRS TAA rye Pe 5 15 Zeng TE Daaa 12 17 J Zn ELEZOUE 15 28 Figure C KETRON 0 AUDYA 11 Display and function buttons Display The heart of Audya is the display The F1 F5 function buttons to the left the F6 F10 function buttons to the right and the five User buttons below the display allow you to select the items displayed in the various screens GRAND PLANO CONCERT RAD meng E GRAND POP BRIGHT HOT TOBK HARPSICHORD LATIN FLA CLAN n WU 53 Pee het Lebe tun F1 F5 function buttons Press the five function buttons from F1 to F5 to lt lt Back button select one voice VOICE or one STYLE or a menu It allows to display the previous five functions displayed on the display for example corresponding to the User 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 8 5 10 2 F6 F10 function buttons buttons see User Assignable on page 113 The same as above 8 gt gt Forward button 3 User buttons It allows to display the next five functions In Arranger mode the five User buttons below the corresponding to the User 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 8 5 10 display will select five FILLS or five BREAKS In buttons see User Assignable on page 113 the other operative modes they will select various functions menus and user functions The serigraphy below the User buttons has the following numbering 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 8 5 10 In
33. YA fom When you save a REGISTRATION in automatic mode J z E d d z M a progressive number of 4 digits is added to the file Figure 107 name 0001 REGIS SRG 0002 REGIS SRG etc numeric keypad by switching the USER 3 button NUMERIC ON Figure 108 Oo Bees or 3 For example by using the option NUMERIC Sa nf c BTS ON just press the number 1 button to recall the TED II Wem k REGISTRATION 0001 or the number 2 button to K Gen Sees Qoae WK recall the REGISTRATION 0002 and so on JE e Bere or as Le To recall REGISTRATION with two digits or oO a ac C more you must digit the number sequence of amp a i mac the REGISTRATION For example to recall the ON EJ C C EJ o ump3tt REGISTRATION 0012 just digit 12 on the numeric EE ee keypad Figure 108 B Creating a REGISTRATION BLOCK The REGISTRATION BLOCK is a bunch of twenty SINGLE REGISTRATIONS or direct You can to store the registration single also when ci functions that can be quickly recalled si trova in altri ambiente type MAIN by pressing the SAVE button and choosing REGISTRATION 4 Press the REGISTRATION button to open the corresponding screen If not selected press the USER 4 button to select BLOCK If there is no file an empty screen and EMPTY FOLDER will appear Figure 109 5 Press the EDIT button Cio La uo 6 Press the USER 1 button CREATE BEEN DC yA 7 The display will show all the SINGLE Y 2 gar A REGISTRATIONS Figure 110 E
34. buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel Figure 147 s Easy 1 Standard functionality with normal chord recognition Some chord can be recognized even if they are played partially For example you obtain a major chord playing only the root By using the root and the minor third you obtain the minor chord By using the root and the seventh you obtain the seventh chord s Easy 2 Similar to Easy 1 but it keeps in memory all the previously played notes even if one note or more are released e Fingered 1 The chord is recognized only by the notes really played s Fingered 2 Similar to Fingered 1 but it Keeps in memory all the previously played notes even if one note or more are released ROOTLESS When the parameter is ON Figure 148 it allows a particular recognition of the chords without the root m MODES 2 By pressing the USER 1 button twice you can access the second MODES window Figure 149 This screen allows to enable disable the VOICE TO ARRANGE function This function lets you play an instrument on the right split accordingly to Variation A B C D of any style 1 From the window with the empty slots Figure 149 press any F1 F4 buttons 2 Press a button on the VOICE section Preset Program or GM Voice 3 By using the CURSOR lt 4 P buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel select an instrument within the category For example FM PIANO of the EL Piano category Figure 150 4 Repeat the operation for each slot 5 Pr
35. panel 5 While the style is playing you can change the in strument choosing from the table by using the DATA VALUE wheel You can assign any GM voice 6 To change the Bass Bank stop the Arranger and repeat from step 3 9900000 Figure 134 Style View 09000090 KETRON e AUDYA 5 f Style View B Storing the style Once you made all the desired settings press the SAVE button on the front panel and give a name from the keyboard to store the style in the current position Figure 135 In the example of Figure 136 the style name is MY_BALLAD The changes can be stored both for styles containing normal parts and Audio Style Modeling The style will be stored in the USER STYLE area in the category previously selected In other words if the style is in the BALLAD category the style will be stored as USER STYLE in the same category B Selecting the style 1 Press the USER STYLE button on the front panel 2 Select the category by using the numeric keypad 3 Select the style by choosing the previously given name Figure 137 58 KETRON e AUDYA on i go go Qu 0 a 5 000008 S Figure 136 Qu ud 000000 A We TITLE A SOW tal xen Le A BLD L STAT A E bai E A SORTIMAT j g 5 Livia brimi b ien 9 Figure 137 Style Mode By pressing the MODE button of the STYLE section you can access the functions and the settings of the Arranger The STYL
36. values ON OFF F6 Right Boost Level maximum level for the Right Boost function value 10 50 when it s applied by the USER buttons This function boosts the volume of the right hand accordingly to the level set by the Right Boost Level parameter MODULATION By pressing the F1 button on the KEYBOARD CONTROL page you can access the MODULATION settings Figure 254 Here you can control the SENSITIVITY parameter for the Modulation Wheel values 0 48 90 KETRON e AUDYA 6 a Oso ga Ge u Qu xx mi a i id gt P A 6 Laf aut T br i LE be Dip LEM PSA Le nan rr Le G hess ag maen s ereen ter a mRNA se Jee memen e Jemp e eee Cen iC rim L i bn Za T E Bait 99000 Figure 252 pen mr pes Le LL Fire Im Le et J aw UNE SE Lesen rt TE um uli P bi Ei mum tem dm 1 a k DI gt wd rb a D 0000009 Figure 253 oo0ogocOoc Figure 254 ui Te 00 ao Nec Ei Wi Sao Ei AFTERTOUCH By pressing the F3 button on the KEYBOARD CONTROL page you can access the settings of the AFTERTOUCH parameters Figure 255 F1 Sensitivity adjustment of the Aftertouch sensitivity values 0 63 F2 Threshold threshold of the Aftertouch values 0 63 F3 Attack Time attack time of the Aftertouch values 0 100 F4 Slide Threshold threshold of the Slide effect values 10 127 The Slide effect must be programmed within a VOICE
37. 1 Smooth To Brass Section Euphonium Piccolo Pop Flute Pan Flute Voice Flute Shakuashi Whistle Classic Flute Ke Pulset Synbrass3 ead Square hick e OIL IO U riangle1 riangle2 Synth8 ynth1 Softpad aw amp Pulse armpad antasy Magic 4 Glockpad 5 Choir Pad Digipad Co Or W i o lt co OO CO O0 CO OO CO NIN IN INI NINININ IN TN O JINI N PIGIA OINI0IO AION O O GIS sik WE DIS D a Sounds 116 Synthat 117 Wave 118 DCycle 119 Synthio 120 Syntha 121 Hit amp Crash 122 Clackson 123 Pfif amp Jew Harp 124 Huu 125 Alarm amp Laser 126 DoorBeli 127 Punchs 128 JArhom N Wo 97 Atmosphere Bowed Pad Digipad E 2 3 O LD oO el D D O O x U o Q esch 00 01 Fantasy 02 Halo Ensemble 04 Digisting Tres 6 Hackbrett Tres Cajun 09 Pan Flute Ac Folkt Jungle Balama Tinkle Triangle Tambora Claves wesch 8 H L O Q wech sech sech je e Wu esch O N 8 CH OO O D C 3 esch O ech D I I Bo sch sesch I l B sesch N O 01 amp G PO g ololelw a oO c 3o 83 3 nare rash ratch1 22 cratch2 3 Scratchs 4 Scrath Scratchb
38. 3 amp 4 You can control the output volume by the PFL slider Overdubbing a WAV file 1 Press the MENU button and the F8 button AUDIO RECORDING to enter the audio recording environment 2 Press the F6 button WAVE RECORDING and the RECORD button Give a name to the file by inputting the characters directly from the keyboard 3 Press the F4 button MIXDOWN to set the overdubbing mode Figure 281 4 Press the USER 5 button START REC to start recording and the STOP button to stop 5 Repeat MIXDOWN procedure by adding new audio material from the keyboard and or from the microphone as you like MIDI RECORDING e Press the F9 button MIDI RECORDING in the MENU screen The recording MIDI page will open By using the F1 F10 buttons you can set the following MIDI recording modes F1 keyboard sets the recording mode from the keyboard F2 MIDI PORT IN GM sets the MIDI data recording mode from the MIDI IN port Recording a MIDI file using the keyboard 6 Press the MENU button and the F9 button MIDI RECORDING to enter the MIDI recording environment 7 You will be prompted to give a name to the file Digit the name for the MIDI file directly from the keyboard Figure 282 In the example the file is MIDI 01 100 KETRON e AUDYA D nm rr LU ER EJ ER EX tJ tJ Figure 281 0999509989 Figure 282 3 uij DC is no Tar Hi uc ei Je IC Press the USER 5 button ENTER Pr
39. 5 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 6 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 7 Agogo Hi 20 Snare005 8 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 9 Cabasa 22 Tom FlamO1 0 Maracas01 23 Tom FlamO2 1 WhistleO1 2 Whistle02 25 Snare007 3 Guiro01 4 Guiro02 5 Caves 28 Snare008 GW Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 7 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 8 Cuica01 31 SticksO01 9 Cuica02 32 Click O TriangleO1 33 Metronome O1 1 Triangled2 2 Shaker01 35 Kick02 3 Shaker02 36 Kick19 4 SticksO2 37 Rimshot09 5 Castagnet 38 Snare021 6 TambourineO2 39 ClapO1 7 Rimshot18 40 Snare028 8 Snare012 9 Snare016 0 Snare013 1 Middle03 2 Stick03 45 Tom03 3 Close 5 Reverse 6 Applause 49 Crash02 7 Belltree 50 Tom06 8 Empt 51 Ride03 9 Empt 52 Crash03 00 Empt 47 Tom04 95 Cowbell02 48 Tom05 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tom06 98 Empt 51 RideO1 99 Empt 52 Crash03 00 Empt 53 RidebellO1 01 Empt 54 TambourineO1 02 Empt 55 Crash04 03 Empt 56 CowbellO1 04 Empt 57 Crash05 05 Empt 58 Vibraslap 06 Empt 59 Ride03 07 Empt 60 Bongo Hi 08 Empt 61 Bongo Low 09 Empt Latin Program Change 66 14 SnareO001 62 Conga Slap 15 RollO1 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom FlamO1 70 Maracas03 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleO1 24 Crash01 72 Whistle02 25 Snare007 73 GuiroO1 26 Maracas02 74 Guiro02 27 Tom34 75 Claves01 28 PanderoOl1 6W Block H 29 PanderoO02 77 W Block Lo 30
40. Bank audio MIDI F3 Bass Bank MIDI F9 Arp amp Lick MIDI F10 Live Guitar audio MIDI If the style uses some audio parts e g Audio Drum or Live Guitar a symbol appears in front of the style name For this reason when you store a style with audio parts inside it s useful to keep the character in front of the name Figure 132 In this way the symbol will appear in front of the style name and you will be able to distinguish between the MIDI styles and the styles containing audio parts For all the sections you can scroll by using the DATA VALUE wheel or choosing directly the Program Change number by using the 0 9 numeric keypad You can find the Program Change numbers and all the Libraries reference at the the end of this manual Figure 132 KETRON e AUDYA 55 Style View The Audio Style Modeling sections 1 Audio Drum The Audio Drum is a stereo Wave file containing an audio rhythmic sequence It can replace the normal Drum Set or be added to it If you want only the Au dio Drum you must set volume of the Drum Set Drum 1 to O The selection of the Audio Drum is made globally for the entire Style Replacing the Audio Drum of a preset style with another Audio Drum could result in MIDI and Audio parts not matching while playing Intro Ending arrangements You can edit the volume of the Audio Drum separately for A B C and D and the other parts of the Arranger Audio Drum is guaranteed to
41. Belltree 98 Empt 51 RideO1 99 Empt 52 Crash03 00 Empt 53 RidebellO1 01 Empt 54 TambourineO1 02 Empt 03 Empt 56 CowbellO1 04 Empt 05 Empt 58 Vibraslap 59 Ride03 07 Empt 60 Bongo Hi 08 Empt 61 Bongo Low 09 Empt Fusion Program Change 33 14 Snare001 62 Conga Slap 15 RollO1 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom Flam 70 MaracasO01 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleO1 LL Iesch Iesch Iesch Lesch Iesch Iesch aah e m 3 Drum Set 24 CrashO1 25 Snare007 26 Fingsnap 01 2 Whistled2 3 Guiro01 4 Guiro02 5 Claves01 28 Snare008 6 W_Block_Hi 29 Scratch Up 7 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 8 Cuica01 31 Sticks01 9 Cuica02 32 Click O TriangleO1 33 Metronome O1 1 Triangled2 2 Shaker01 NINININ 0O NINININ 35 Kick30 3 Shaker02 36 Kick06 4 Sticks02 37 Rimshot19 5 Castagnet 00 00 00 38 Snare081 6 TambourineO2 39 ClapO1 7 Rimshot04 8 Snare022 9 Snare009 42 Stick03 O Snare010 1 Middleo2 2 Stick02 3 Close02 4 OpenO1 5 Reverse 48 Tom05 6 Applause 49 Crash02 7 Belltree 50 Tom06 8 Empt 51 RideO1 9 Empt 52 Crash03 O Empt 53 RidebellO1 54 TambourineO1 56 CowbellO1 58 Vibraslap 59 Ride03 60 Bongo Hi 61 Bongo Low 09 Empt Brush Program Change 41 62 Conga Slap 15 RollO1 63 Conga_Hi 6 Roll02 17 Snare002 5 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 6 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 20 Snare005
42. By pressing the and buttons you can transpose the overall pitch in 24 semitones up or SLOW BALLAD down 1 semitone step including the Arranger l l m l except the drum The display shows the current ALLAL Grand_Piang TRANSPOSE value Figure 13 Press the and Tempo Ha Transp buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the transpose value to 0 Figure 13 B OCTAVE The and buttons allow the pitch of the RIGHT part to be shifted up or down by one split W Octave Up octave The display shows the current value of ROTOR G Ma The SLOW and FAST buttons allow to change Figure 14 the speed of Rotary Speaker when you select DRAWBARS in the VOICE section and for the voices for which the ROTARY SPEAKER setting is set to ON B PORTAMENTO Turns the PORTAMENTO on and off only the voices for which the portamento has been TA ax im programmed For example the SYNTH family JE se ww ILR EL 4 JL emen E IL B AFTER TOUCH m moss ES ai Turns the AFTER TOUCH on and off only A KOSI mock D M the voices for which the after touch has been Al L oth ho a e Kg programmed GUITAR SYNTH etc Oo lone CT WA m DRUM SET ui d Selects one of the 53 built in DRUM SETS to play DU E EN EN KE directly from the keyboard Figure 15 For more details see DRUM SET section Figure 15 18 KETRON e AUDYA BASS The MANUAL TO LOWEST and BASSIST buttons set the following mod
43. CLOSE PARAL as above F5 CHORD 5 CLOSE PARAL as above F6 CHORD 1 NORMAL RETR sets how the chord plays In RETRIGGER mode the chord re trigger each time it is played F CHORD 2 NORMAL RETR as above F8 CHORD 3 NORMAL RETR as above F9 CHORD 4 NORMAL RETR as above F 10 CHORD 5 NORMAL RETR as above as above as above SN NO By pressing the USER 4 button again CHORD turns off as shown by the lower arrow on Figure 159 you can access the INVERSION function corresponding to F1 button This function allows the control of the notes and the transposition threshold so the notes are automatically moved to the lower octave instead of being played on the higher octaves By using the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel you can set the Eb E F F G notes as shown by the arrow on top of Figure 159 LOWER The USER 5 button LOWER opens the edit window for the left hand Figure 160 F1 LOWER 1 HOLD enables the hold control Hold on the first Lower section The setting is valid for all the Styles F2 LOWER 2 HOLD enables the hold control Hold on the second Lower section The setting is valid for all the styles F3 OFF STOP when is ON it exclude the the Lowers during the Stop condition F4 MUTE global mute of the two Lowers The setting is valid for all the Styles F5 MODE sets various modes for the Lower sections By using the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons or the DATA
44. CONTROL page you can access a window like Figure 261 where you can set the Arabian scale parameters F1 Left Scale sets the Arabian scale for the left hand Values NO ARR and LOW that is no scale Arabian scale to the Arranger or to the Lower part F2 Footswitch pedal modes Values NO NOTE AR SET that is no parameter pedal controlling the note or the Arabic set from 1 to 16 F7 Arabic Set selection of one Arabic set from 1 to 16 F8 Koma Tab Harmony activation of the Koma function which replaces the HARMONY button in order to alter dynamically the pitch of the scale while you are playing O2 KETRON AUDYA ES El Bimi Pre Fab cree fees imam gg t im Ri Crue bee bar rati Geet tem ms j S CT aa HL C sd l a ao g em kon EE KW LH b m b oob6o9ot Figure 258 You can choose the percussive instrument among those listed in the list at the end of this manual For example kick01 cymbal07 snare018 and so on 0999599599 ce lii Qu go go o0ocoOogocO Figure 260 Pen l E TI LJ iTi nr Tm z WE EH 1 Len br ix aM CJ oO Pomii E m wr aC ag Seil D m l er pum E 56000000 Figure 261 B FOOTSWITCH e By pressing the F8 button from the KEYBOARD CONTROL page you can activate the FOOTSWITCH screen Figure 262 where you can assign the functions to the pedalboard connected on the rear The opti
45. Crash03 NININININIO IO O00 8 KETRON 0 AUDYA 137 Drum Set 31 SticksO1 32 Click 80 TriangleO1 33 Metronome O1 81 Triangled2 82 Shaker01 83 Shaker02 36 Kick15 84 SticksO2 37 RimshotO7 85 Clap04 38 Snare029 86 TambourineO2 39 Clap03 87 Rimshot12 88 Snare031 89 Snare032 90 Kick16 91 Kick15 44 Close03 93 Stick08 46 Close06 94 Middle06 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 51 RideO1 52 Crash03 53 RidebellO1 55 Crash04 103 Empt 56 CowbellO1 57 Crash05 58 Vibraslap 06 Empt 59 RideO2 07 Empt 60 Bongo Hi 08 Empt 61 Bongo Low 09 Empt Techno Program Change 26 4 SnareO001 62 Conga Slap 63 Conga Hi 6 Roll02 64 Conga Low 7 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 8 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 70 Maracas01 23 Tom FlamO2 24 CrashO1 71 WhistleO1 72 Whistle02 25 Snare007 26 Fingsnap 01 73 Guiro01 74 Guiro02 28 Snare008 29 Scratch05 75 Claves01 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 31 SticksO1 78 Cuica01 32 Click 79 Cuica02 80 TriangleO1 33 Metronome O1 81 IriangleO2 34 Metronome 02 82 ShakerO1 35 Kick15 83 Shaker02 36 Kick17 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshot13 85 Clap04 38 Snare034 86 Tambourine02 39 Clap03 40 Snare033 88 Snare035 89 Snare077 90 Snare028 91 Kick28 44 StickO9 92 Kick29 93 Stick08 46 MiddleO5 94 Middle06 95 Middle08 48 Tom30 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tom31 98 ClapO7 99 Clap08 52 Crash03 53 RidebellO1 5
46. Fast Song eliminates measures at the beginning of the Midi file usually Count In or Setup Measure Values ON OFF F5 Show File Icon enables disables the icons display for the file types Values ON OFF KI Figure 263 KETRON 0 AUDYA 93 F6 Intelligent Transpose affects the transposition of the MIDI file Each instrument is transposed within its natural octave Values ON OFF F7 LINE IN enables disables the LINE IN input The input volume is controlled by the S PDIF LINE IN SFX slider of the PLAYER section Values ON OFF F8 Remix Live Guitar enables disables the Live Guitar of the style when making a MIDI Remix Values ON OFF F9 Headphone to Out3 amp 4 values ON OFF F10 Video Lyric enables disables the Lyric display on remote screen monitor In other words the Lyric OFF affects also the remote monitor Values ON OFF By pressing the USER 5 button you can access the next settings page press USER 4 to return to the previous page as shown on Figure 264 Here you can find the following functions F1 Cross Fade Mode selects the Cross Fade mode Fade 1 Fade 2 Fade 3 F2 Cross Fade Velocity sets the Cross Fade speed Normal Fast 1 Fast 2 Slow 1 Slow 2 F3 Fade Time sets the Fade time of the Master values 1 20 F4 Player Autoload enables disables the automatic loading of the TXT file together with WAV MIDI MP3 see Text scrolling function on page 117 and of the file WAV associated to t
47. MIDI reception channel from 1 to 16 by using the CURSOR a gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel F1 Voice1 F2 Voice2 F3 Voice3 F4 2ndVoice1 F5 2ndVoice2 F6 GM RAM Voices F7 Drawbar F8 Click F9 Percussion KETRON 0 AUDYA 7 9 FILTER PROG CHANGE RX From the first screen of the MIDI menu by pressing the F7 button a window will appear where to set the Program Change reception filter Figure 220 By using the buttons F1 10 you can select the parts to filter F1 Right F2 Left F3 Bass F4 Drums F5 ALL PARTS F6 Global global channel of the keyboard F7 Registration F8 Voicetron F9 ARRANGER CHORDS opens another window F10 VOICE DRAWBAR opens another window Select the MIDI reception filter options by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel Press the CURSOR a gt buttons to set the FILTERED value to activate the filter or the value to deactivate the filter The filter options are the following Figure 220 221 222 Chorus Effect TRANPOSE RX EXPRESSION Sust Soft Sost PORTAMENTO WHA S Mono Poly WHA ADSR ADSR 1 0 CUTOFF From the first screen of the MIDI menu by pressing the F3 button a window will appear where to set the MIDI reception of the parts transposition By using the F1 F10 buttons or the CURSOR A V buttons you can select the parts to transpose via MIDI reception as shown in Figure 223 By using the CURSOR a buttons or the DATA VAL
48. OIII a aaa n miocio esch 77 78 76 79 Bass Bank 2 8BALLAD1 2 8BALLAD2 6BEAT 1 OBEAT 1 BEAT 2 OPOP 1 BEAT 1 8BEAT 2 8BEAT 3 e N D O1 O Co BLUES 1 BLUES 2 BLUES 3 BOLERO 1 BOLERO 2 BOOGIE 1 BOOGIE 2 BOSSA 1 BOSSA 2 BOSSA 3 BOSSA 4 BOSSA 5 6 8 9 CO ogieieieigimpigigigigigigimgigio m S SE EE o SEI E m ss 2 2 2 Z2 Z2 2 2 2 Z 5 6 6 0 5 45 PS Ss e m kal Ca d i Se co IIo NO PN gt m 2 NIN D 0 0 0 O1 O1 O1 IOC 3 10 FUNKY 10 11 FUNKY 11 UNKY 12 UNKY 13 UNKY 14 16 9 USION 3 ITANA 1 GITANA 2 GITANA 3 NO Co i NO N NIN wesch oy gt mnmimimimimimimimimi mi mi Ti T 71 7 86 89 9o Je 96 98 99 C C2 G OOJO M N U U U ITI ITI ITI rrr w N Qo HOUSE 1 NO O N NO eo co esch O O HOUSE 2 HOUSE 3 HOUSE 4 HOUSE 5 HOUSE 6 HOUSE 7 HOUSE 8 HOUSE 9 i CIJI ELSE Ce cjele 3 3 RR E I it l CIC a SE SC CS ND wech sesch Jwh wech sesch wesch O1 01 01 01 01 01 O1 CO oOoo O OO Oto ie gt e NO O lt sch a e sch NIe a a E o lo ojoj o O N 01 O amp O1 amp G CO ATINROCK IGHTPOP 3 14 1 16 1 18 0 1 22 24 25 NO CICIT Oo I esch Wu
49. PIANO Press the VOICE LIST button A screen like Figure 202 will appear showing the first ten memory locations Press the CURSOR to jump to the second page and see the next ten EMPTY VOICE locations By using the F1 F10 buttons select an empty memory location Figure 203 If you want you can replace the voice in that location later Press the EDIT button The VOICE LIST button flashes Select any keys in the VOICE section For example EL PIANO if you want to stay in the same family but you can choose any other family of course By using the F1 F10 buttons and the CURSOR lt q for page selection select any voice For example E POP on the second page of EL PIANO Figure 204 Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection If you want choose further voices following the same procedure from step 5 to step 7 changing each time the memory location by using the F1 F10 buttons and the CURSOR a gt until you finish your favourite VOICE LIST Figure 205 Press SAVE corresponding to the USER 5 button or press the SAVE button on the panel to store the custom VOICE LIST Press the EDIT button to exit edit mode The VOICE LIST button will stop flashing At this point if you press the VOICE LIST button you will display your custom list for each family of the VOICE section om Qu Qu XR a OD Ki om ga go Qu D K ka Wi KE Tz PAIS CLASSIC F
50. VALUE wheel you can set the following values Normal standard mode with the Lower always active Bas Lower only when the Arranger is stopped the manual bass and the chord play together Hold Stop holds the Lower also when the Arranger is stopped instead of being disabled in normal condition 64 KETRON e AUDYA JEI s ie eee wx OD or spese INC Ho are denjen d no Wie ac 6ococO0o0oo s Figure 158 m Ba e u j 00 50 Te 56000005 Figure 159 KIRCH mpeg IC BK el LE Tx ae t 0999595989 Figure 160 GM Part When MIDI Player is playing back you can open the window to control the parts corresponding to the MIDI tracks of the file Figure 161 by pressing the GM PART MIXER button on the PLAY CONTROL section By using the USER 1 5 buttons you can see the pages where to set all the parameters of the MIDI tracks of the file The USER 1 5 buttons allow to edit the following items GM PARTS FILT TX RX FILT TO ALL 16 PARTS UTILITY B GM PARTS USER 1 By pressing GM PARTS default selection the F1 F10 buttons allow to set the following parameters F1 VOLUME F2 REVERB F3 CHORUS DISTORTION ECHO F4 PAN F5 MUTE F6 SHIFT 36 semitones transposition F CHAN TX ON OFF F8 CHAN RX ON OFF F9 MODE VOICE VOCAL DRUM F10 SOLO You can change the GM part that is the track of the current MIDI file by using the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons The par
51. WAV file with lyric is playing back or paused the MAIN VIEW window is divided into two sections Figure 54 the section LYRIC on the right side the list of the WAV files on the disc on the left side In this way while the current file is playing back you can select a file from the list by using the CURSOR A YW buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel and start by using the button ENTER To return to the main window press the F3 button or F4 again Main View RI um me a ut J Qu T em 20 JU wom Viez S el DEO si ee ao A En c uv U s s s Jg Uu Figures So ao LT BE DO AP Was p Wu D r TES kp us HD BOEN o HI CARGA oi s 109 alla era n a RITE g mam vw Funky Tune cm go Teter aC Veedel ao y 0000000 emm dr Loo tee t m Fusion Funk STAGE_73 0090999599 Se fie me DX ri e eens PU E ure dg Hp opcm 0 Ld E pes fy fie Coste Duns H F m 7 Kr DR ie peril drum ou hep Gre D BASE IIIe ES FER T ee net rete nl EDT SP RIT erg eh F IET LI I Taal o0oQgocOocooO Figure 54 KETRON e AUDYA 33 Main View MP3 SFX Player MAIN VIEW From the MAIN VIEW window you can select directly the MP3 or SFX files on disc B Selecting an MP3 SFX file from MAIN VIEW 1 The default MAIN VIEW window allows the selection of MIDI files For this reason it s necessary to press the MP3 button or SFX button of the Player A list of MP3 fil
52. are the built in styles of Audya and can be accessed by using the keypad in the STYLE section and the ordinary selection of the style by using the F1 F10 buttons as already described in the Styles chapter on page 17 The styles of this family cannot be modified meaning that you cannot overwrite them You can load these FACTORY STYLES into memory and play them However you can edit the style currently loaded in memory by using the edit pages described in STYLE VIEW See on page 53 Then you can store the edited style as USER STYLE B Storing a FACTORY STYLE as a USER STYLE 1 Select a FACTORY STYLE 2 Once you have modified the style in the Style Modeling environment see STYLE VIEW on page 53 press the SAVE button 3 You will be prompted to input a name for the USER STYLE Digit a name on the dialogue box by inputting characters directly from the keyboard and press SAVE again Figure 330 4 After saving the style will be available in the USER STYLES area Figure 331 5 Load the modified style from the USER STYLES area by pressing the USER STYLES button To reload the style that you have modified and stored you must search it and load it from the USER STYLES area 114 KETRON e AUDYA St EN ga go Sa Oa Dd 30668 GK Figure 331 mui R 00 a Som MSP function MSP Audya offers a complete Multi Sample Player editor To access the MSP function press the WAVE button
53. buttons F1 F5 The function buttons at left of the display allow the selection of voices styles controls parameters etc that are shown on the left side of the display accordingly to the different operative modes By pressing a function button the name on the display is highlighted in blue colour 6 Function buttons F6 F10 As above Function buttons at right of the display D Display Colourful backlit liquid crystal display LCD See on page 12 the explanation on how to operate the display Brightness Small knob for the display brightness adjustment Turn clockwise counter clockwise in order to match the right brightness of the display accordingly to your needs and the environmental light conditions 6 KETRON e AUDYA 9 User Back and Forward buttons The five User buttons and two Back lt lt and Forward gt gt buttons below the display allow the selection of the functions that appear on the display accordingly to the operative modes see on page 13 Arranger Conductor This section contains the buttons for real time control of the Arranger Intro Ending button Start Key Stop ABCD Fill In Break Tempo Hold see on page 13 di Data Value This group is made of one wheel and four CURSOR buttons a gt A WV By using the wheel and cursor buttons you can input
54. by the Tap Enable Disable function By pressing the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together you set the value to 0 After you set the parameters you can to store the custom Echo by pressing the USER 5 button SAVE or the SAVE button on the front panel A brief SAVE DATA TO DISK message will appear 1 D gu So ga gae isi Du iJ D AR So go Qu oO CO Honey Ec ncc Stereo Echo Mores Toten Showy E Kor peras Siren fone Moray Eris ster Exhot gis al m 7 mnm mum Weit TEED Leg NL xix 999000 Figure 237 00000 Figure 239 UUVSU Figure 240 KETRON e AUDYA 85 Wi u aO Wi DC ano Ce DISTORTION By pressing the F4 button on the DSP page you can access the DISTORSION screen as shown in Figure 241 Here you can select the DISTORTION type to set into the DSP in order to make it available for PROGRAMS from which you can choose a DISTORTION algorithm Figure 242 10 Distortion Presets are available in the first page and 10 in the second by pressing any CURSOR button or the DATA VALUE wheel Press any F1 F10 button to select the corresponding Distortion type Overdrive Overdrive3 Tube1 and Tube2 Distorsion1 Distorsion3 UZZ Hot British Org Over1 Org Over3 Over User1 and Over User Dist User1 Dist User2 and Dist User3 When you activate a Distortion Preset you can set the option Lock On Off as for the previous effec
55. by using the DATA VALUE wheel or by using the F1 F5 buttons DUET TRIO QUARTET QUINTET and FIXED INTERV or the DATA VALUE wheel Saving a VOCALIZER effect 1 Once finished press the SAVE button on the front panel 2 Adialogue will appear to give a name Figure 321 Digit the name by using the keyboard and press the USER 5 button SAVE 3 Once saved you can recall the custom effect from the second page of the VOCALIZER window Figure 322 0099055999 Figure 322 KETRON 0 AUDYA 111 Search Search Main View Audya features a useful SEARCH function in order to search files stored in the internal disk or in external USB devices When is the MAIN VIEW is active the search engine looks different from the normal view B Searching a file in the MAIN VIEW window 1 2 3 Press the SEARCH button The last open directory of the disc will appear Figure 323 Use the CURSOR A Y buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel and the ENTER button to search a folder Digit the name of a file even partially inputting letters and numbers from the keyboard In Figure 324 only the character S is inputted the engine locates the first entry of the file name starting with an S The found file will be highlighted In Figure 325 by entering the second character the engine locates more precisely what you are looking for Repeat inputting characters as you like When the file you are looking for it s found you
56. choose a file from the list in the WAVE folder and press the EDIT button B Creating an MSP 1 Select a WAV format file from the WAVE folder and press ENTER to load the file into memory W Figure 332 By using the F1 F10 buttons you z z z s z z F can access the following functions Em 332 F1 START sets the start of the note range on the keyboard Press a button on the keyboard for the automatic assignment Figure 333 or use the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR a gt F2 END sets the end of the note range Figure EL 334 as described above el EE F3 KEY sets the basic pitch Press a button on KA aa the keyboard for the automatic assignment F4 PITCH it can be TRACKING that is tuned l Eii EFF mu ep F uri 4t i TT d Be Daa EE rity La ml n a hjj Fal aer i DU IRI ud r o G I m for each button of the keyboard or FIXED that is AME eor rcr with fixed pitch for any keys of the keyboard D Ki G z s z z F5 FINE fine tuning of the sound up to 99 TT cents of a semitone F6 VOL sets the output volume F7 CUTOFF sets the cutoff frequency low cut filter jo F8 EP END POINT sets where the sound ends HX mort o T Ss ata SS F9 LP LOOP POINT sets where the sound m i loops uere mW e 2 By using the USER 1 button PAGE gt gt you can B jump to a further screen to edit the parameters m G of
57. data change parameter values or navigate through the lists and menu items accordingly to the operative modes see on page 15 2 Transport This section includes Start Stop and Count In Restart controls in Arranger mode or Start Stop and Pause for the song currently selected d3 Style This section is for the selection of the Arranger styles see Selecting the Styles on page 17 User Style Disk area This section is for the User Styles selection and the disk management see on pages 114 118 5 Voice section dedicated to the selection of the voices see Selecting voices on page 14 Player Multimedia Player see Player on page 21 47 Voicetron Microphone and voice effects see Voicetron on page 25 Master Main output control see Master on page 27 Rear panel All the connections to external devices are on the rear panel In the figure below each number corresponds to its description Im 1 Headphone 9 Line In Standard stereo jack for the headphone The Standard RCA connectors for line right left input Master volume adjusts also the headphone output RIGHT LEFT of stereo devices with line level level signal CD Player etc 2 Gain 2 Sustain Pedal Gain adjustment of the signal input level of the Standard mono jack for the connection of one Micro 2 jack Sustain pedal optional 3 Micro 2 4 Volume Pedal Standard combo mono jack for the connection of Standard stereo jack for the c
58. explained later Program HX Bi Le 00 oo Inc ooO0ooo 0 Figure 81 lew 0999595989 Figure 82 Oe eege Weg x ku ka Figure 83 Ei Qu Qu ke ka Figure 84 KETRON e AUDYA 41 Program e F1 F6 VOICES you can assign up to three VOICES to the same PROGRAM as already seen in the first PROGRAM EDIT screen e F2 F7 REVERB you can adjust the reverb effect send Values from 0 to 63 Figure 86 By pressing together the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons you set the reverb send to O If in the EFF MODE page you choose an effect like DIST DIST CHO or DIST ECHO CHO you cannot adjust the REVERB send independently for each voice The parameter adjustment of the effect send is common to all three voices so the adjustment of one effect send affects all the effect sends FS F8 CHORUS you can adjust the Chorus effect send when you select the CHORUS effect type in the EFF MODE page Values from 0 to 63 By pressing the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together you set the effect CHORUS send to 0 Figure 87 e FA F9 ECHO you can adjust the Echo effect send when you select the ECHO effect type in the EFF MODE page Values from 0 to 63 By pressing together the CURSOR a gt buttons together you set the effect ECHO send to 0 Figure 88 e F5 F10 DISTORSOR you can adjust the distortion effect send when you select the DIST effect type in the EFF MODE page Values from 0
59. function works both as FADE Out and FADE Note that the fade out does not apply to the In Just press the FADE button while the Arranger or microphone output In this way you will be able the Player are stopped to talk sing during the fade out KETRON 0 AUDYA 27 Main View Main View The new MAIN VIEW interface allows to display all the items of the main screen in a more easy to operate way B Activating the MAIN VIEW d 2 3 Press the MENU button on the front panel to open the screen MENU as shown in Figure 35 Press the F4 button corresponding to KEYBOARD CONTROL as shown by the arrow in Figure 35 Press the F10 button corresponding to UTILITY as shown in Figure 36 Press the USER button 5 NEXT PAGE as shown in Figure 37 Press the F6 button to select MAIN VIEW as shown in Figure 37 Now you can ulf the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR lt 4 gt to select the value OFF or ON as shown in Figure 38 Press the EXIT button to go to the previous window of the MENU Press the MENU button to exit the MENU environment B Storing MAIN VIEW at start up Once out of the MENU environment you may want to store the new MAIN VIEW at start up of the keyboard Press the SAVE button on the front panel A screen like Figure 39 will appear Press the F6 button corresponding to CUSTOM STARTUP At start up the display will be set to the new MAIN VIEW 28 KETRON e AUDYA 5 6 a0 D i E CLICK La vito mo
60. lowers the influence on the filter Values from 0 to 63 default 32 e F10 LFO The F10 button opens a further edit page to modify LFO parameters Figure 72 that is the parameters of the Low Frequency Oscillator You can access the LFO parameters by using the F1 F10 buttons The selected parameter can be modified by using the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons The value range for each parameter is from O to 63 Press the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together to set the default value 32 F1 VIBRATO RATE vibrato frequency F2 VIBRATO DEPTH vibrato depth F3 VIBRATO DELAY vibrato delay F6 LFO RATE oscillator frequency F7 LFO TVF LFO amount on the filter F8 LFO TVA LFO amount on the amplifier After you have modified the parameters of each VOICE in the VOICE EDIT page press the USER 1 button Progr Edit to return to the previous page Select a different VOICE by using the F1 or F6 buttons and press the USER 1 button Voice Edit to modify the voice parameters 38 KETRON AUDYA RH Do ui GC a L g D Qu at oogoOogo O0 Figure 70 oogoOogoo Figure 71 Pl uij sao T co oog 9 Figure 72 Press the USER 1 button Progr Edit to return from the LFO page to the VOICE EDIT page Press the USER 1 button Progr Edit again to return to the initial PROGRAM EDIT page If you set an organ DRAWBARS on the VOICE number 3 of the PROGRAM the parameters of t
61. owCut USER 2 ighCut USER 3 oudness USER 4 User USER 5 VIBRATO By selecting the F9 button a VIBRATO screen only for MICRO 1 like Figure 300 will appear where you can choose one of the available Vibrato effects by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel PITCH By selecting the F10 button a PITCH screen only for MICRO 1 like Figure 301 will appear where you can set the parameters to change the pitch Select the PITCH SHIFT parameter by using the CURSOR A V buttons and change the value by using the CURSOR 4 or the DATA VALUE wheel values 24 semitones Select the PITCH CORRECTION parameter by using the CURSOR A W buttons and change the value by using the CURSOR a gt or the DATA VALUE wheel Off Slight Slow Medium Fast 106 KETRON e AUDYA om a BO Oo TT ZS mmo We C D mo A m Rs sao Ch O9990000 Figure 298 0039598988 Figure 299 0999999609 Figure 300 2 U gu Sa Qu Qu 0999590990 Figure 301 Saving a microphone effect After you have modified one of the MICRO PRESETS you can save it by overwriting the same Preset or giving a new name Here is the procedure to follow 1 2 3 Select a MICRO PRESET Press the EDIT button on the front panel and edit the parameters as explained above Once finished press the SAVE button on the front panel Type a name by using the keyboard for example MY MICRO and press the US
62. pop 3 Soft air 4 Dark 5 Energy 6 Delicate 7 Opera 8 Crooner 9 Light 10 Tremolo 11 Vibrato 12 Breathy 13 Shaky 14 Phone 15 Angel 16 Alien 17 Cartoon 18 Nasal 19 Strange 20 Deep 21 Girl 22 Drunk 23 default 95 Ee none Auto Chord presets preset tables for Auto Chord mode NRPN 96 eo 01 data 07 These preset tables are uploaded by the user through a Ces sysex message sysex ID 1 so you must send such a sysex at least 47 once before using this NRPN Please refer to the sysex section for D9 more information regarding the content of the preset tables and how Ze af to upload them into Voicetron This NRPN builds a harmony table from a root and one of the 10 um stored preset tables The NRPN value is formatted as follows Value LEE 12 Table number Root Table number ranges from 0 to 9 and Root from C 0 to B 11 For instance if you have uploaded the following harmonies in the preset tables Major Minor Major 7th Minor 7th you can then get a D minor harmony by sending a NRPN value of 12 Minor D 12 1 2 14 To get an Am7 chord you will have to send 12 Minor 7th A 12 3 9 45 Note if you ve downloaded a custom harmony table using a Sysex 0 calling this NRPN will overwrite it 3 Vocalizer output 0 Main 1 Aux KETRON 0 AUDYA 153 NRPN NRPN Data Default Parameter MSB LSB MSB value Pitch to MIDI conversion 11 0 Pitch to MIDI switch enables pitch
63. range of 24 semitones e F9 REMIX ON OFF enables disables the MIDI REMIX see the details on page 47 The F6 F9 buttons on the next page enable the following functions e F8 PFL ON OFF enables disables the PFL e F9 LEAD 4 selects the channel of the melody from 1 to 16 in case of MIDI file The default value is MIDI channel 4 e F10 PREV NEXT by pressing this button NEXT you can access to next page From this page you will go back by pressing the PREV previous button KETRON 0 AUDYA 21 Player B DJ LOOP The DJ LOOP button enables the DJ LOOP screen where you start playback of the selected audio loop Figure 20 The fader below adjusts the volume of the track To navigate in this screen use the cursor buttons the ENTER and EXIT buttons as described for the WAVE screen The DJ LOOP song are a particular kind of looping tracks prepared for several music genres The USER 5 button allows the JUMP NORM IMM function normal immediate jump B MP3 The MP3 button enables the MP3 screen where you start playback of the selected track Figure 21 The fader below adjusts the volume of the track To navigate in this screen use the cursor buttons the ENTER and EXIT buttons as described for the WAVE screen m SFX The SFX button enables the SFX screen where you start playback of the selected track Figure 22 The fader below adjusts the volume of the track To navigate in this screen use the cursor buttons the E
64. section features nine vertical faders The first fader at left allows to control the USER functions See User Assignable on page 52 The remaining eight faders control the volumes of the ARRANGER parts and the volumes of the VOICES parts When the DRAWBARS mode is on the nine faders of the Mixer will adjust the footage of the organ For details see on page 16 and on page 31 ARRANGER Lll M cst ORCHESTRA LEAD DRUM BASS STYLE MASTER DRUM BASS B USER This first fader at left allows to control the USER ASSIGNABLE functions described on page 52 The default value is the volume control for AUX 3 4 output B ARRANGER These five faders adjust the volumes of the Arranger parts of the style Respectively STYLE MASTER main volume of the style DRUM drum part volume BASS bass part volume CHORD volume of the chords part LOWER volume of the left split B VOICES These three faders adjust the volumes of the VOICES parts on the keyboard Respectively LEFT volume of the voice on the left split 2ND volume of the second voice on the right split RIGHT volume of the voice on the right split The volumes of the parts are shown on the display Figure 18 In the upper part at left the STYLE MASTER volume is shown In the upper part at right the RIGHT and 2Np volumes are shown In the lower part at left DRUM BASS CHORD and LOWER volumes are shown 20 KETRON e AUDYA L WER When a MIDI file
65. the SAVE button and give a name to the NUMERIC option is automatically disabled 48 KETRON e AUDYA B Recalling a REGISTRATION from the MAIN VIEW window If the MAIN VIEW function and the NUMERIC ON function are enabled by pressing the F2 button you Can directly recall the REGISTRATION number by using the numeric keypad 1 From the MAIN VIEW window press the F2 button Enter Number gt will appear Figure 114 2 Digit a REGISTRATION number by using the numeric keypad Wait Please will appear Figure 115 The corresponding REGISTRATION will be automatically searched and loaded 3 Ifthe NUMERIC ON function is disabled you must manually select the REGISTRATION by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel and by pressing the ENTER button Figure 116 SR e t LD kat d DA H uiJ no 506006 SL Ei BI Qu Se a Qa SS MEQ 5 n i GER a um K dei Lm 00OgOCOOOOOS 0ocogO0ogoo Figure 116 KETRON 0 AUDYA 49 Play List Play List By pressing the PLAY LIST button you can access the Play Lists stored on the hard disk In order to create a Play List follow the procedure below B Creating a PLAY LIST 1 Press the PLAY LIST button A screen like Figure 117 will appear showing a PLAY LIST demo x 2 Select PLAY LIST DEMO by pressing CURSOR Ww CO and press the EDIT button T 990009 Figure 117 3 Press the CREATE button 4 Press on
66. the current position With BACK and FORWARD keys is possible to assign other 5 USER_TABS_PRES By using the buttons F6 F10 you can assign to the USER slider the following functions F6 PFL sets the PRE FADER LISTEN volume control F7 WAVE FILTER sets the cutoff frequency on the WAVE Player F8 CHORD 1 WHA WHA sets the USER slider to adjust the cutoff frequency of the chord 1 in order to produce a Wha Wha effect By pressing repeatedly the button you can set the same function to CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 BASS ALL CHORDS ALL STYLE and RIGHT User Assignable ames ao u H UR rap wagrm u LJ d MEER TABS PRES HORII WHA WHA W i C Li epp rap PS rCATAMENTO mme L LJ g IER TARS PERSA CeO ED CITCET CJ E dmg e bates Errem i Ei there m vi i Ti n nc o0ogocO0ogooO Figure 328 goOoogo Figure 329 ARRANGER AUX 3 4 DRUM BASS ORCHESTRE DRUM BASS CHORD AAG F9 PORTAMENTO TIME sets the USER slider to adjust the portamento time F10 CHORD 2 CUTOFF sets the USER slider to adjust the cutoff frequency of the chord 2 By pressing repeatedly the button you can set the same function to CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 BASS ALL CHORDS ALL STYLE and RIGHT KETRON 0 AUDYA 113 User Styles User Styles Audya features two style families FACTORY STYLES and USER STYLES The FACTORY STYLES
67. this manual we use USER 1 USER 2 etc for short F1 F2 F3 F9 and F10 function buttons The F1 F2 F3 F9 and F10 function buttons allow you to access the AUDIO STYLE MODELING when pm they are used in STYLE VIEW mode in the PLAY CONTROL section see details on page 53 Press the STYLE VIEW button and one of the following F1 Audio Drum see groove list on page 123 Press F1 to set the AUDIO DRUM part F2 Groove Bank see groove list on page 125 Press F2 to set the GROOVE BANK part F3 Bass Bank see groove list on page 127 Press F3 to set the BASS BANK part F9 Arp amp Lick see groove list on page 128 Press F9 to set the ARP amp LICK part F10 Live Guitar see groove list on page 129 Press F10 to set the LIVE GUITAR part 12 KETRON e AUDYA User buttons In addition to the FILL and BREAK selection in Arranger mode and other assignable user functions see User Assignable on page 113 the five User buttons can access many functions For example while in the different operative modes MENU DISK PLAYLIST STYLE VIEW DRUM MIXER and so on these five User buttons allow the selection of further pages that open their own settings menus In the figure you can see how the User buttons in STYLE VIEW mode allow the selection of the VOICE EFFECT PAN and MUTE SINGLE pages By pressing one of the five User buttons you can view the content of the corresponding page Arranger Conductor buttons
68. to midi conversion Refer to Pitch 1 127 output section for more information about this feature 12 0 4 2 Note trigger sensitivity this parameter affects the responsiveness of the algorithm for triggering a new MIDI note Lower values makes the algorithm require a more stable pitch before sending a Note On message Higher values makes the algorithm respond faster on note onsets lower perceived latency but increases the likeliness of artifacts You can also use NRPN 96 14 to mitigate potential artifacts while keeping the latency low enough 13 0 4 2 Pitch transition tolerance affects the way the algorithm handles pitch transitions between notes i e when the pitch glides from a note to another The lower the tolerance the more the algorithm will consider these transitions as a discontinuity it will therefore send a Note Off to shut down the old note then a Note On to start a new note after the transient The higher the tolerance the more the algorithm will consider theses transitions as a glissando it will keep the current note playing while adjusting its tuning to follow the input pitch Note you must always have Note trigger sensitivity lt Pitch transition tolerance By design it is impossible to have a high Note trigger sensitivity and a low Pitch transition tolerance at the same time Therefore if you set one of these two parameters the other may be automatically adjusted to comply with this constrai
69. voice F10 CONTROLS opens a further control page for the 2ND VOICE Figure 76 where to switch the following parameters ON OFF F1 PORTAMENTO ON OFF enable disable the Portamento control F2 AFTERTOUCH ON OFF enable disable the Aftertouch control F3 PITCH BEND ON OFF enable disable the Pitch Bend control F4 MODULATION ON OFF enable disable the Modulation Wheel control F5 EXPRESSION ON OFF enable disable the Expression control om go go Qu Z a 5 cju gu Li g Cp Z e OD Ki om ga LJ g Ge Program OoQgoQqo pus 73 9G00CGCG Pus 74 g Ime EL ba n 00000 Figure 75 OOOGOOg Figure 76 KETRON e AUDYA 39 Pl Bi Te p ao Soo a Pl B DCH lw BE DCH Ch Plu BE Program EFF MODE The USER 3 button opens a screen like Figure 77 where all the parameters for EFF MODE will appear that is the effects mode of the PROGRAM Use the F1 F10 buttons to modify the parameters of the effects mode Once you select a parameter you can modify the value by using the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons e F1 F6 VOICES you can assign up to three VOICES to the same PROGRAM as already seen in the first screen of PROGRAM EDIT page e F2 F7 REV TYPE you can choose a reverb type Figure 78 For example tudio1 heatre1 heatre2 tage1 tage2 Church1 Church2 Hangar Galaxy pace ser R
70. volume from 0 to 63 By pressing the CURSOR a gt buttons you set the value to O Figure 166 3 Press the F3 or F8 buttons repeatedly to highlight one of the 16 parts tracks of the MIDI file By using the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons or the DATA VALUE you can set the Reverb from 0 to 63 By pressing the CURSOR a gt buttons you set the value to O Figure 167 4 Press the F4 or F9 buttons repeatedly to highlight one of the 16 parts tracks of the MIDI file By using the CURSOR a gt buttons or the DATA VALUE you can set the Chorus from O to 63 By pressing the CURSOR a gt buttons you set the value to O 5 Press the F5 and F10 buttons to set the MUTE and SOLO function of the selected part respectively When the part is in MUTE or in SOLO condition an asterisk will appear In Figure 168 the part 1 is in SOLO condition While more parts can be muted only one part can be soloed To find one or more parts in MUTE condition press the F1 F6 F2 F7 F3 F8 or F4 F9 buttons repeatedly Press F5 or F10 to disable the MUTE condition Press the F10 button SOLO twice if you want to disable quickly the MUTE condition on any part 66 KETRON e AUDYA cya go Qu Xo e gt KK Figure 164 0OgOOOCOO Figure 165 Uu lo wl wl of ol ol a H maTi ji m A umm Figure 166 ui Bi Te p B0 Ino Ia Ri Bi le Bi Nac Ch Jut 00 DC B0 ano iQ io n
71. wheel The values are from O to 128 0 100 cents Press F7 SHIFT to set the pitch by 32 semitones in one semitone step of the percussive instrument by using the CURSOR a gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel In Figure 192 the pitch is 16 semitones Press the USER 5 button SAVE to store the user DRUM SET give a name directly from the keyboard and choose the position where to store In Figure 193 the name given to the user DRUM SET is MY DRUM Setting a USER DRUM SET in a style 1 2 3 After you have selected a style press the STYLE VIEW button on the front panel Press the F1 button to select the drum part of the style If Audio Drum is displayed press F1 again to select Drum1 By using the CURSOR a gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel select one of the DRUM SET created by the user In Figure 194 the selected USER DRUM SET is MY DRUM NOTE Please see all the DRUM SET lists and the percussive instruments included into the drum sets in the Sounds section of this manual 72 KETRON e AUDYA uj B 00 eo ac IQge E GA Figure 190 BI uJj DCH ao Ei o09goO0oQg Figure 191 si me 0 0996569999 Figure 192 0999599999 Figure 193 weg E le E ei A SR o ort Oo rie an ii m C UC aprM H o0000009 Figure 194 Drawbars By pressing the DRAWBARS button on the VOICE section you sw
72. x_Slap ser 8 unch4 4 4 DID NIN O NIOJ O 8 NO C1 CD esch NO O 7 NO N Ul i NO KETRON e AUDYA 121 Sounds GM Voices BANK D CCO Value 11 N Wo Concert L Concert R Latin Piano Pulse Clavi Piano2 jo age Piano rawbar Detune ynth1 1 Concert_Bright Harps Wide Harps Octave ElPiano Detune Marktree Vibraphon Wide arimba Wide uff Organ alian 60 hurch Octave ipe Octave isa8 ues Harp assotto mooth Folk c Folk2 Folk amp Slide Melobar Country2 Thin Strato Ac Nylon1 azz Octave NO co Cc Cco Co ro o hD h o h D2 PD PO D N OJIJI N Ml O O OI IN O O1 AIIN O 00 N O O01 G Concet L Concet R Latin Piano Pulse Clavi Concert Bright Harps Wide Harps Octave Bang Detune Marktree Vibraphon Wide 60 T O D C Drum Set N DRUMSET tandard1 tandard2 oom Gm2 ower Gm2 ectro Gim2 azz Gm2 nalog Gm2 tandard Gim2 olk coustic1 ech azzDry Vintage O 01 0 00 A S IPI AIOIOOINININ c co oOo 4 Io Co O CO CO NO NO O 122 KETRON e AUDYA N Wo eedback_Guit huck_5TH JI m o mijo im o9 D Cell kat nger_Slap tro nbass9 nbass10 nbass1 1 nbass12 ynbass13 ass amp Guit3 ingerpick taccato wing Tpt ean Detune ountry Slide tin
73. 0 Snare036 8 Snare031 9 Snare030 42 Stick06 O Kick20 OO CO 14 Snare001 62CongaSlaop 15Rol j63CogaHi 16 Roll02 64Conga Low 17 Snare002 65Timbaeshi 18 Snare003 Leg Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67AgogoHi 20 Snare005 68Agogolow 21Snare 06 1 69Cabasa 22 Tom Flam01 70MaracasO8 23 Tom Flam02 71WhistleO 24 Crasho 72 Whistle02 25 Snare007 73Guiroo 26 Maracas02 74Guiro02 27 Tom34 75Claves 28 Pandero01 76W Block Hi 29 Pandero02_ 77W Block Lo 30 Pandero03 78Cuica l 31 Kick40 1 79Cuica02 32 Kick39 j80TrangeO 33 Tomi9 j8fTriangeO2 34 Metronome 02 82ShakerOi_ 35Kick33 j83ShakerO2 36 Kick04 1 84SticksO2 37Rimshotl 85Castagnet 38 Snare009 1 86TambourineO2 S9 Clapo 87Rimshotos 40 Snare 1 j88Snare00 41 Tom07 Log neren 42 StickO2 Lon SnareO28 43Tom08 1 91 GuiraQd 44 Close01 92Guira02 45Tom09 1 93Tambora d 46 Openo 94TamboraO2 47 Tomi0 1 95TamboraO3 48 Tomi 96 Applause A8 Crash 1 97CowbellO3 P Tom j98Empy 51 Ride03 Log Empty 52 Crash0o3 100 Clap07 53Ridebelldn 101ClapB 54 Tambourine01 102 Empty 55 Crasho4 103 Empty 56 Cowbell 104 Empty
74. 12 40 Snare080 88 Snare019 89 Snare020 90 Snare021 43 Tom08 91 Kick03 44 Middle04 92 Kick08 45 Tom09 93 Stick03 94 Open02 95 Close 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tom12 98 Clap07 51 Ride01 99 Clap08 52 Crash03 00 Empt 53 RidebellO1 01 Empt 02 Empt 55 Crash04 03 Empt 56 CowbellO1 04 Empt 57 Crash05 05 Empt 58 Vibraslap 06 Empt 59 RideO2 07 Empt 60 Bongo Hi 08 Empt 09 Empt Melorap Program Change 84 62 Conga Slap 15 RollO1 63 Conga Hi 16 Rollo2 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom Flam01 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleO1 72 Whistle02 75 Claves01 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica0l 31 SticksO1 79 Cuica02 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi Drum Set 32 Click 80 TriangleO1 16 RollO2 onga 17Snare002 GH Timbales Hi gt Aaogao OM e 33 Metronome 01 81 TriangleO2 82 Shaker01 35 Kick50 83 Shaker02 36 Kick21 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshot16 85 ClapO1 38 Snare031 86 TambourineO2 39 ClapO2 87 RimshotO3 40 Snare029 88 Snare047 89 Snare048 90 Snare072 44 Stick08 92 Kick15 93 Middle05 46 Middle06 94 Close04 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 52 Crash03 53 RidebellO1 54 TambourineO1 57 Crash05 58 Vibraslap 59 Hide03 60 Bongo Hi 61 Bongo Low 21S9nare006 69Cabasa 22 Tom Flam01 70 MaracasO1i 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleO1 24 CrashO1 72 Whistle02 nareOU Aaulrotc 6 F
75. 17 Selecting StyleS wwwmmmmmmamamamana 17 Play CON ia 18 POA EE 18 VI EN 20 M RECON 20 PU AV GL E 21 PAY E 21 VOEON E 25 VOICEtrON vacates secs ET 25 Master ccs osne na 27 VIP EE 2 VENU 28 EIN TUTE 28 Autoswitch Time 29 Main View description 30 MIDI Player MAIN VIEW 32 WAVE Player MAIN VIEW 33 MP3 SFX Player MAIN VIEW 34 DJ LOOP Player MAIN VIEW 35 Keele 36 PEOGL If 36 Regostration ENEE 46 PUY LAGI PP AA EA 50 WEIT 51 Double Harmony esses 52 VIE VION 53 Audio Style Modeling 55 The Audio Style Modeling sections 56 Style Mode II 59 GI PAE em 65 DA MIXET EE 68 4 KETRON e AUDYA IN SOG E 71 RECHT ee 73 RAM Ins Supersolo saannnoonnnnannnnnnnnonnnnnnna 74 VOE Mi E 75 Msg e 76 VU BEE 76 MIDI Remis 102 VOICE ON EE 104 Search Main View nnnm 112 User Assignable 113 User SIES eege 114 User StUIES WA 114 MSP Function eer 115 VK 115 Text Scrolling E 115 B E 118 IA UA nae EAEE 118 Bt 119 Saar EE 119 Drive USB Search 119 Technical tables w w wwmmamamaaa 119 GM VOICeES as
76. 2 The screen where to choose the MICRO a PRESETS will appear Figure 31 e ER fr fX C C Ge 3 Press the F1 F10 buttons to set one of the MICRO d gt J z Y J z PRESETS that is an effect for the microphone Figure 31 connected to MICRO 1 and or MICRO 2 input 4 Press the CURSOR gt to scroll the MICRO PRESETS pages By pressing the F1 F10 buttons you can access two pages with ten MICRO PRESETS each PAGE1 AA F3 VIBRATO KETRON 0 AUDYA 2D Voicetron B Setting a VOCALIZER effect 1 2 3 Press the VOCALIZER button The screen where to choose the VOICETRON PRESETS will appear Figure 32 Press the F1 F10 buttons to set one of the VOICETRON PRESETS that is an effect for the microphone connected to MICRO 1 input Press the CURSOR gt gt to scroll the pages of VOICETRON PRESETS By pressing the F1 F10 buttons you can access two pages with ten VOICETRON PRESETS each PAGE1 J PAGE2 B Editing a VOCALIZER effect 1 2 Select a VOCALIZER effect By pressing the EDIT button a screen like the Figure 33 will appear Press the F1 F10 buttons to access the parameter settings of the VOCALIZER F1 DUET duet effects two voices F2 TRIO trio effects three voices F3 QUARTET quartet effects four voices F4 QUINTET quintet effects five voices F5 FIXED INTERV fixed interval effects F6 VOCODER vocoder parameters F7 VOICES EDIT para
77. 2 F7 BLUEGRASS DOWN ue dmn 8 TRILL F8 BUEGRASS UP AR ag 9 REPEAT F9 COUNTRY UP go gw Je F10 ECHO 10 COUNTRY DOWN Sp Hee BC 4 an The types of HARMONY marked by an asterisk o a m h on the table above are special effects of trill Qu 7g OU OO repetition and echo You can access the speed Faus 123 parameter SPEED for these special effects by pressing repeatedly the USER 2 button below the display The available SPEED values are 6 8 12 and 24 In the example shown in Figure 123 if you select the TRILL effect you will hear the trill effect produced by the note played at right or left of the starting note You can modify the speed of the trill by using the SPEED parameter corresponding to the USER 2 button 52 KETRON e AUDYA Style View From the STYLE section on the front panel you can select a style by using the numeric keypad If the style uses an Audio Style Modeling please note that a symbol appears before the style name otherwise the name appears without any symbol Figure 124 In order to view and or edit the parts of the style with or without an Audio Style Modeling you can press the STYLE VIEW button of the PLAY CONTROL section In this screen the display shows the 10 parts of the style currently selected By pressing the F1 F10 buttons you can select the corresponding part of the style Figure 125 and Figure 126 e F1 DRUM 1 e F2 DRUM2 e F3 BASS e FA LOW 1 e F5 LOW 2 e F6 CH 1
78. 2 KETRON e AUDYA N STYLE 6 GOGOR 8 JAZZ QUARTET 9 JAZZWAZ N STYLE 6 GARAGE ROCK 8 METAL ROCK 9 ON THEROCK UNPLUGGED STYLE F 8 2 5 6 LM 8 9 a0 ie 12 3 LM 15 6 E 18 3 4 5 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Drum Set Standard 1 Program Change 1 14 Snare001 62 Conga Slap 63 Conga Hi 64 Conga_Low 65 Timbales_Hi 66 Timbales_Lo 67 Agogo Hi 68 Agogo Low 69 Cabasa 70 Maracas01 71 WhistleO1 72 Whistle02 73 Guiro01 74 Guiro02 75 ClavesO1 76 W Block Hi 77 W Block Lo 78 Cuica01 79 Cuica02 80 TriangleO1 81 TriangleO2 82 Shaker01 83 Shaker02 84 Sticks02 85 Castagnet 86 Tambourine02 87 Rimshot02 88 Snare011 89 Snare012 90 Snare013 91 Middle01 92 Stick02 93 Close02 94 Open02 95 Reverse 96 Applause 97 Belltree 98 Empt 99 Empt 00 Empt 09 Empt Standard 2 Program Change 2 Drum Set 08 Empt 09 Empt Room Gm2 Program Change 3 14 Empt 62 Conga Slap ch h esch leesch Jeck lech AA lech j KETRON 0 AUDYA 133 Drum Set Power Gm2 Program Change 4 08 Empt 09 Empt Electro Gm2 Program Change 5 ch lesch Joch lesch Jeck lesch Leesch lech j 134 KETRON e AUDYA 71 WhistleO1 72 Whistle02 73 Guiro01 74 Guiro02 76 W_Block_Hi 9 9 9 9 9 9 109 Empt Jazz Gm2 Program Change 6 9E 46 Open 9E 87 Kick39 93 Empt 9
79. 232 187 299 319 233 16 237 236 _ 19 LA 234 18 218 235 219 12 13 14 221 15 232 187 299 319 233 16 237 236 19 17 234 18 218 235 219 238 20 esch 88 BOOGIE 155 1 BOSSAI125 2 BOSSA2 150 3 CHACHA 127 14 CHA ROCK 1220 CTRY1 121 NO c 3 N O O1 NIIN L A N O J lt JJ O CH A Go E Oo CTRY1 121 CTRY2FX 126 CTRY2RX 126 CTRY2 126 CTRYBEATI 122 CTRYBLD 108 CTRYFOX 120 CTRYPOP1 110 CTRYPOP2 99 CTRYPOP3 86 OIO 415 J x wo gt S g4 NIN Z No Ras OJN O O J lt T O Ee J Ke NO o CTRYROCK1 94 CTRYUP1 110 O SS lt D O O A Ss Ke o I OIO 315 D x D OIO OIO A A MTN Z N O n C2 OIOIO l JJ lt lt lt COD e Ee JJ XIIS SS ZIN SES CH I lt c U N 0 gt lt o CTRYUP2 110 DISCO 122 DISCO2 112 DISCO3 120 DISCOFUNK 115 DIXIE1 210 VUIVSVUIVOSVUSVUSVULVUIVUIVIOIO IO alolSlSlSlESlElSlEIElCICIA Oloizazizizizizizizim mi O ln 9 9 6 O O O O OF lt c mi mi mimimimim mimi lz vii 3 e o 2 m 2 Aaa iS e o X ro Le In oO wsoj em9L rS KS CH CO ooo elm OH OQ DI OJO O O SI gt lt gt lt ln ojojo NJOJ OI OJO OJOJO AAE C mi zi BI NO O 239 2 2 141 26 28 240 189 224 273 29 30 165 176 274 31 275 184 185 276 186 277 32 278 190 33 171 172 34 35 279
80. 3 wesch AA 2 34 SLOW ROCK a a SOKA 2 STOPFUMK ane 7 swnes 3 SWNG FOG OI k eck d D 5 5 Nk NO 7 7 Ke N 3 SWING FOX i SWNG FOG 55 WNGO2 6 TARANTELLA 7 TARANTELLA 2 I TRIPL_16SMOTH 48 TRIPL_DISCMK 7 s TMPLDISCO 2 TRIPL DISOWH a TRIPL_POP 69__ TRIPL_POP2 s TRPLRNB uewe so WALIZ3 o2 WESTERN AIN JI NM oO g 0 04 5 e O1 NO CO ech SIS KETRON 0 AUDYA 129 Styles AUDYA FACTORY STYLES BALLAD STYLE 3 4 5 T 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 The symbol before the name of the STYLE means that the style has AUDIO DRUM GROOVES or LIVE GUITAR parts 130 ketron AUDYA DANCE N STYLE 6 DEEP amp BASS 1 8 DISCO 70S 9 DISCO DANCE COUNTRY TYLE APACHE BLUEGRASS 3 COUNTRY BEAT 4 COUNTRY FOX 5 COUNTRY QUARTET COUNTRY ROOTS 7 COUNTRY SURF RISH FOX IRISH SLOW FOX 10 IRISH WALZ KRAMER BALLAD 12 ON THE ROAD 13 QUICK STEP 14 ROCKABILLY 15 UP COUNTRY 1 16 UP COUNTRY 2 WALKING FOX 18 OLD CNTRY WALZ 19 WESTERN 1 WESTERN 2 ALLAD 12 8 22 COUNTRY BALLAD 23 COUNTRY DIXIE COUNTRY WALZ BALLROOM N STYLE 4 ENGLISH WALZ S FOX TROT H GULLY 1 7 H GULLY 2 TALPOLKA MAZURCA R
81. 3 77 Tambora01 78 Tambora02 79 Tambora03 80 Empt 81 Empt 82 Empt 84 Empt 85 Empt 86 Empt 87 Empt 88 Empt 90 Empt 91 Empt 4 Empt 5 Empt 6 Empt 7 Empt 8 Empt 9 Empt 22 Empt mpt 24 Empt 25 Empt 26 Snare101 27 Snare102 28 Kick57 29 Roll03 30 Kick56 31 RollO4 32 Snare103 33 Roll05 34 Snare066 35 Kick55 36 Kick57 37 Rimshot21 38 Snare067 39 Snare088 40 Snare089 41 Tom38 42 Stick21 43 Tom37 44 Stick22 92 Empt 45 Tom36 93 Empt 46 OpenO8 48 Tom33 49 Crash10 50 Tom32 98 Empt 51 Ride08 52 Crash11 100 Empt 53 Ridebell03 54 Middle09 55 Crash12 103 Empt 56 Middle10 57 Crash12 105 Empt 58 OpenO8 59 Ride09 60 Maracas0O1 108 Empt NO NIN lesch lesch leck esch Co O Mim mm 33 O IO m Iesch Co Co co C2 m m 3 3 UO UO e KETRON e AUDYA 149 NOTE ON 9nH kk vv n O OFH midi channel kk 01H 7FH 2 NOTE ON vv velocity 01H 7FH vv 0 means NOTE OFF NOTE OFF 8nH kk vv n O OFH midi channel kk 01H 7FH NOTE OFF 9nH kk 00H vv don t care if command 8nH PITCH BEND EnH bl bh Pitch Bend as specified by bl low bh high bl 2 00H 7FH bh 00H 7FH 14 bit resolution Maximum swing is 1 tone default Can be changed using RPN 0000H Center position is bl2 00H bh 40H Min bl 2 00H bh 00H Max bl 2 7FH bh 7FH PROGRAM CHANGE HANNEL ONTROL 008 ONTROL OTA ONTROL 05H Portamento time ONTROL 06H Data Entry Provides data to RPN NRPN ONTROL 07H ONTROL OAH BnH OAH co
82. 36 258 259 260 261 142 222 37 39 143 38 40 317 41 280 42 43 Audio Drum IXIE2 226 LECTRO 84 THNO 129 OX1 115 OX2RX 115 OX2 115 OXS3 164 OX4 164 OX5 115 4 FUNKYIRX 97 45 FUNKYSRX 116 UNKYARX 116 UNKY5 104 08 FUNKY6 116 82 0 25 26 FUNKY9 119 USIONRX 103 USION 103 ARAGE1 96 GARAGE2 108 TIA TY aa 1 TT 7I JI EZ O1 O1 O1 O1 O1 S 52 3 RIA A AJIO N gt 9 0 0 N 0 A 11 71 71 71 NIN 0 O C1 INJO 71 71 71 NO 7 NO co TI NO T NO O TI I N e 3 Q C O co O GUAJIRA 90 HIPHOP 81 1 HOUSE1 126 91 HOUSE2 127 92 HOUSE3 132 HOUSE4 128 27 HULLYGUL 122 AZZROCKRX100 AZZROCK 100 IVE1 180 3 JIVE2RX 164 67 7 MAMBO_ MARCH4 4 MARCH6 8 Ke NIO OJAN a o Co NIO n2 n2 D Oo G CO NO NO co Co c O1 AMBO 90 20 00 lt gt N C JJ A gt A Co 0 MERENGUE 140 91 MODERATO 12 89 MODERATO2 112 92 PARTYFOX 100 ARTYPOLKA120 25 PASODOBLE1 120 ASODOBLE2 120 73 PIEDS 108 15 PIZZICA1 96 1 OLKA 120 ho JE OI mimi Jimi D gt gt iira OIO m SEIN mrd ard E m N 9 esch NO U esch co LA Ke LA O1 U C2 esch CO U U i KETRON e AUDYA 123 Audio Drum Audio Drum 7 149 72 150 74 151 75 78 152 79 Bo 82 154 84 155 285 204 2
83. 4 Empt 95 Empt 96 Empt 97 Empt 98 Empt 99 Empt 52 Crash03 Dog Empt 53 Ridebell01 Dot Empt 02 Empt 03 Empt 04 Empt 05 Empt 06 Empt 07 Empt 08 Empt 09 Empt Analog Gm2 Program Change 7 62 Conga Slap 63 Conga Hi 64 Conga Low 65 Timbales Hi 66 Timbales Lo 67 Agogo Hi 68 Agogo Low 69 Cabasa 70 Maracas02 71 WhistleO1 72 WhistleO2 73 GuiroO1 74 Guiro02 75 Claves02 76 W Block Hi 77 W Block Lo 78 Cuica01 79 Cuica02 80 TriangleO1 81 TriangleO2 82 Shaker01 83 Shaker02 84 Sticks02 85 Castagnet 86 Kick40 87 Kick39 88 Empt 89 Empt 90 Empt 91 Empt 93 Empt 94 Empt 95 Empt 96 Empt 97 Empt 98 Empt 99 Empt 00 Empt 01 Empt 02 Empt 09 Empt Standard Gm2 Program Change 8 44 Stick11 92 Empt Drum Set 67 Agogo Hi 76 W Block Hi 78 Cuica01 80 TriangleO1 81 Triangle02 86 Kick40 87 Kick39 88 Empt 8 90 E 9 9 9 9 95 E 9 9 9 9 62 Conga Slap 63 Conga Hi 65 Timbales Hi 84 Sticks02 86 Tambourine02 26 Finasnap 01 74 Guiro02 27 Slap 75 Claves0O1 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi KETRON 0 AUDYA 135 Drum Set 107 Empt 61 Bongo Low 109 Empt Acoustic 1 Program Change 10 102 Empt 136 KETRON e AUDYA Jazz Dry Program Change 11 62 Conga Slap 63 Conga Hi 64 Conga Low 65 Timbales_Hi 66 Timbales Lo 67 Agogo Hi 68 Agogo Low 69 Cabasa 70 Maracas01 71 WhistleO1 72 WhistleO2 73 GuiroO1 74 Guiro02 75 ClavesO1 76 W Block Hi 77 W Block Lo 78 Cuica01 7
84. 5 Crash04 103 Empt 56 CowbellO1 57 Crash05 58 Vibraslap 59 Ride02 60 Bongo Hi ech NO ch Lesch Lesch Iesch NO C1 o 3 5 Tl sesch DU 3 O o UJ O O o I NO si H D O O O O OO NIOO 138 KETRON AUDYA Progressive Program Change 28 14 Snare001 62 Conga Slap 15 Roll01 3 Conga_Hi 16 Roll02 4 Conga Low 17 Snare002 5 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 6 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 7 Agogo Hi 20 Snare005 8 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 9 Cabasa 22 Tom Flam01 0 Maracas01 23 Tom FlamO2 1 WhistleO1 2 Whistle02 25 Snare007 3 Guiro01 26 Fingsnap 01 4 Guiro02 5 Claves01 28 Snare008 6 W Block Hi 29 Scratch03 CW Block Lo 30 ScratchO4 8 Cuica01 31 SticksO1 9 Cuica02 32 Click O TrianaleO1 33 Metronome O1 1 Triangled2 2 Shaker01 3 Shaker02 36 Kick45 4 Sticks02 3 Rimshot16 5 ClapO1 38 Snare059 6 TambourineO2 39 ClapO2 7 RimshotO1 40 Snare061 8 Snare036 9 Snare031 0 Snare070 1 Kick22 2 Kick15 3 Middle05 46 MiddleO06 4 MiddleO1 5 Reverse 6 Applause 50 Tom25 8 Empt 51 RideO1 9 Empt 52 Crash03 00 Empt 53 RidebellO1 01 Empt 02 Empt 55 Crash04 03 Empt 56 CowbellO1 04 Empt 05 Empt 49 Crash02 7 Belltree 58 Vibraslap 06 Empt 59 Ride03 07 Empt 60 Bongo Hi 08 Empt 09 Empt Rave Program Change 29 15 RollO1 16 Roll02 5 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 6 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 20 Snare005 8 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 9 Cabasa 22 Tom Flam01 23 Tom Flam02 1 WhistleO1 2 Whistle02 25 Snare007 3 Gu
85. 500000 Figure 153 BASS The USER 3 button BASS opens the edit window for the bass part of the Arranger By using the F1 F10 buttons you can set the following options F1 BASS TO ROOT Figure 154 brings all the automatic bass notes to the root of the recognized chord F2 RETRIGGER the bass re triggers by using the root note each time the chord is recognized F3 PEDALBOARD enables the functionality of the bass MIDI pedalboard F4 MONO POLY Figure 155 sets the monophonic or polyphonic behaviour of the manual bass and the pedalboard F5 OCTAVE Figure 156 octave selection for the manual bass and for the pedalboard within 2 octaves range F6 SUSTAIN Sustain length for the manual bass and for the pedalboard values from O to 64 F PEDAL TO CHORD the bass pedalboard takes a part in the chord recognition In this way you can control the automatic bass by using the pedalboard while the automatic chords are always controlled by using the left hand F8 PEDAL DYNAMIC Figure 157 dynamic control by using the pedalboard Use the CURSOR a gt buttons to set a fixed dynamic value from O to 127 Press the buttons together to return to normal mode F9 PIANIST BASIC BASS special feature of the automatic bass within PIANIST mode You can play the root note of the chord for the beat length When the beat ends the bass will follow its original line F10 BASS ALTERNATE special mode for the alternate bass that follows the c
86. 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom Flam01 70 MaracasO01 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleO1 72 Whistle02 73 Guiro01 74 Guiro02 75 Claves01 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica01 31 SticksO1 KETRON e AUDYA 141 Drum Set 32 Click 80 Triangle 33 Metronome 01 81 TriangleO2 82 Shaker01 35 Kick33 83 Shaker02 36 Kick23 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshot14 85 Clap03 38 Snare077 86 Tambourine02 39 Clap12 87 Rimshot20 88 Snare045 89 Snare071 42 Stick08 90 Snare057 91 Middle08 44 Stick16 92 Stick07 93 Stick18 46 MiddleO5 94 Middle06 48 Tom30 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 52 Crash03 53 RidebellO1 54 TambourineO1 Lesch Lesch 55 Crash04 03 Empt 56 Cowbell01 57 Crash05 esch Lesch Lesch 58 Vibraslap 59 Ride03 60 Bongo Hi 08 Empt 61 Bongo Low 09 Empt Hip Box Program Change 60 14 SnareO01 62 Conga Slap 15 RollO1 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 65 Timbales Hi LE 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom Flam01 23 Tom FlamO2 71 WhistleO1 72 Whistle02 25 Snare007 26 Fingsnap 01 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica01 31 Sticks01 32 Click 80 TriangleO1 33 Metronome 01 81 Triangled2 82 Shaker01 35 Kick27 83 Shaker02 36 Kick15 84 SticksO2 85 Clap02 38 Snare076 86 Tamb
87. 8 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 22 Tom FlamO1 O Maracas01 23 Tom FlamO2 1 WhistleO1 2 Whistle02 25 Snare007 3 Guiro01 4 Guiro02 5 Caves 28 Snare008 _Hi 29 Scratch Up 7 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 8 Cuica01 31 SticksO01 9 Cuica02 32 Click O TriangleO1 1 Triangled2 4 74 IN INNO O O O OC SIN o UJ O O o I 33 Metronome 01 2 Shaker01 35 Kick03 3 Shaker02 4 Sticks0O2 37 Rimshot06 38 Snare023 6 TambourineO2 39 Snare024 7 Rimshot05 8 Snare026 0 Snare043 1 Middleo2 44 Close 2 Stick03 3 Close02 46 OpenO1 4 OpenO2 5 Reverse 6 Applause 49 Crash02 7 Belltree 8 Empt 51 RideO3 9 Empt 52 Crash03 0 Empt 53 RidebellO1 54 TambourineO1 OO 109 OO CO CO CO OOo CO CO NININ CO Co 36 Kick13 LB KETRON 0 AUDYA 139 Drum Set 56 Cowbell01 58 Vibraslap 59 Ride04 60 Bongo Hi 61 Bongo Low 109 Empt Brush Gm2 Program Change 42 62 Conga Slap 63 Conga_Hi 64 Conga_Low 65 Timbales Hi 18 Empt 66 Timbales Lo 67 Agogo Hi 68 Agogo Low 69 Cabasa 71 Whistle01 72 WhistleO2 75 Claves01 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 31 SticksO1 32 Click 80 TriangleO1 33 Metronome 01 81 TriangleO2 34 Metronome 02 82 ShakerO01 35 KickO3 83 ShakerO2 36 Kick13 84 Sticks02 37 Rimshot01 38 Snare023 86 Kick40 39 Snare024 87 Kick39 40 Snare025 41 Tom01 42 Stick01 43 Tom02 44 Close 45 Tom03 46 OpenO1 47 Tom04 48 Tom05 49 Crash02 50 Tom06 51 RideO1 52 Crash03 53 R
88. 86 85 210 _ C 87 156 88 89 157 90 96 OP 60FX 140 OP 60RX 140 OP 60 140 OP1FX 77 OP1RX 77 OP1 77 OP2RX 76 74 POP2 76 151 POP3RX 85 75 POP3 85 78 POPBEAT 91 152 POPCITYRX 90 79 POPCITY 90 153 POPCOOLRX 90 OPCOOL 90 OPFUNKI1FX 94 OPFUNKiRX 94 OPFUNK1 94 OPFUNK2FX106 OPFUNK2RX106 OPFUNK2 106 OPFUNK3RX 95 OPFUNK3 95 OPLIGHTRX 82 OPLIGHT 82 OPMIX 85 OPSTREET 81 87 POPSTREFX 81 156 POPSTUDIORX91 88 POPSTUDIO 91 OPTRIPLET 75 157 POPTRIPLTRX75 58 JI O 149 72 150 82 154 1 84 155 3 285 204 286 85 210 U U J J JJ JJ JJ 23 2J3 23 223 232 2J2 JJ U U 0 TI TI ITI ITI Qo QO QO QO QO QO Qo RO gt gt gt gt C C C C C C CIC mirmirmirm TI ITI ET ET ET TH TI ITI 3I Ilz o 02 00 C00 CO2 CO2 OD OD ZIZIZI BN ENEJ INEEN ENE ojol ljoj zij ojoliz c old O1 CH SEI O 59 2 87 3 4 RAP 85 7 RAVE 125 88 6 66 95 NO C1 REGGAE 81 01 RNB10 88 02 RNB11 81 03 RNB12 63 04 RNB13 81 05 RNB14 80 06 RNB15 114 07 RNB16 106 308 RNB17 100 309 RNB18 96 310 RNB19 110 wuj NININ ni CA CD NJN 28 124 KETRON e AUDYA C1 Elba al lal el Oi Gack kb eel SS O O A Qo SS O Lr Lr ES an Co O 12 RNB21 100 13 RNB22 90 ROCK amp ROLL18O0 ROCK amp ROLLRX18O __ ROCKIRX 120 ROCKSRX 127 1 8 11 RNB20 100
89. 9 shown from the arrow in Figure 272 O6 KETRON e AUDYA B VIDEO MODE From the main page of the MENU press the F7 button VIDEO MODE to open the page for the video settings Figure 273 By using the F1 F10 buttons you can open the following settings pages F1 MODE sets the VGA video output for lyric display karaoke or as MIRROR all that you see in the display is mirrored on a VGA monitor F2 HOR START sets the horizontal start position F3 HOR POSITION horizontal position F4 VERT START sets the vertical start position F5 VERT POSITION vertical position F6 BACKGROUND sets the background colour F7 NORMAL TEXT sets the normal text colour F8 HIGHLIGHT FORE sets the highlighted text fore colour F9 HIGHLIGHT BACK sets the highlighted text background colour F10 LYRIC UPPERCASE sets upper lower case for lyric text karaoke ZB Sa 5o go Go 0999509989 Eea M BALL ui Pie Fa Le el sei pe i mor vm iie mem HON ETAET nones zeri face D LI wamama joua Leslie wet hari jen pen mun H LJ VERT PERITO MEME i L ps DEN apr 1 a irc 1a PR SE VIe Figure 273 KETRON 0 AUDYA 97 B AUDIO RECORDING From the main page of the MENU press the F8 button to open the AUDIO RECORDING page dedicated to audio recording Figure 274 By using the F1 F10 buttons you can set the following parameters F1 MP3 RECORDING MP3 f
90. 9 Cuica02 80 TriangleO1 81 Triangle02 82 Shaker01 83 Shaker02 84 Sticks02 85 Castagnet 86 Tambourine02 87 Rimshot05 88 Snare009 89 Snare012 90 Snare013 91 MiddleO1 92 Stick04 93 Close02 94 Open02 95 Reverse 96 Applause 97 Belltree 98 Empt 99 Empt 00 Empt 01 Empt 02 Empt 03 Empt 04 Empt 05 Empt 06 Empt 07 Empt 08 Empt 09 Empt Vintage Program Change 12 esch Drum Set 39 ClapO1 87 Rimshot03 40 Snare016 88 Snare022 Rock Program Change 17 41 Tom01 89 Snare010 62 Conga Slap 63 Conga Hi 64 Conga Low 65 Timbales Hi 66 Timbales Lo 67 Agogo Hi 68 Agogo Low 69 Cabasa 0 Maracas01 71 WhistleO1 72 Whistle02 73 Guiro01 74 Guiro02 55 Crash04 5 Caves 56 Cowbell01 04 Empt 08 Empt 09 Empt 34 Metronome 02 35 Kick05 Acoustic 2 Program Change 15 36 Kick54 14 Snare001 62 Conga Slap 37 Rimshot21 15 RollO1 63 Conga Hi 38 Snare086 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 39 Clap01 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 40 Snare084 19 Snare004 67 Agogo Hi 42 Stick19 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 43 Tom37 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 51 Ride03 02 Empt 09 Empt EE A8 Sticko4 90Snare0033 14 Snaredot 1 ga Slap 3 Conga Hi 4 Conga Low 5 Timbales Hi 2 Jimbales HI 8 Agogo Low 9 Cabasa 1 WhistleO1 2 Whistle02 2 Whistle 2 Guirao 7 W Block Lo 8 Cuica0t 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 44 Stick20 27 Slap 75 Claves01 50 Tom32 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 41 Tom38 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 52
91. 999 Figure 304 5a erer 00 Lues tir E ET Di 0999898988 Figure 305 KETRON 0 AUDYA 107 Voicetron Editing a VOCALIZER effect 1 Select a VOCALIZER effect 2 By pressing the EDIT button a window like Figure 306 will appear Press the F1 F10 buttons to access the parameters of the Preset F1 DUET duet effects F2 THRIO trio effects F3 QUARTET quartet effects F4 QUINTET quintet effects F5 FIXED INTERV fixed interval effects F6 VOCODER vocoder parameters F VOICES EDIT voices parameters up to 5 voices Volume Pan Formant Detune Cutoff Resonance F8 EQUALIZER 10 bands graphic equalizer F9 EFFECTS effects parameters F10 VOCAL TO ARR automatic setting of the vocalizer and the Arranger DUET By pressing the F1 button the list of DUET effects similar to Figure 307 will appear from which you can choose one of the available duet effects by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel Bluegrass Folk 1 Up Down olk 2 Down Bluegrass Up Folk 3 Up Country Down Country Up Folk 1 Down Chained Up Chained Down TRIO By pressing the F2 button the list of TRIO effects similar to Figure 308 will appear from where you can choose one of the effects di trio available by using the CURSOR A Y buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel Standard 2 Down QUARTET By pressing the F3 button will appear the list of effects QUARTET similar to Figure 309 from which you can choose one
92. Audya includes a built in professional organ with nine faders for digital Drawbars control You can create in real time all the sonic power of a real tonewheel organ featuring percussion click rotary speaker distortion vibrato and much more USB Audya has an internal large hard disk accessed by USB connection from a computer In this way you can easily manage the musical content of the disk and make backup copies of your songs and settings Moreover two USB ports on the front side panel accept any USB storage device such as pendrives external hard disks CD and DVD players and more Voicetron The new Voicetron section features a vocalizer with a new five voices engine The vocalizer has an effects library with many presets that can easily fit all the needs of the singer You can also edit the parameters to your needs for example to set the Vocalizer effects set to automatically follow the Arranger or the MIDI file playback Key Tunes You can assign a song to each button of the keyboard Every button tune has loop capabilities and can be played as a DJ User interface The top panel is designed to help musicians especially during their live performances Seventeen sliders one slider is User assignable allow powerful and efficient control over volumes and effects There are also numerous buttons with a built in LED showing their on off status A large colourful LCD display with TFT technology 320x240 pixels and a m
93. D a a O ojoioijo Oo Cc c n5o esch O N e Em O afee DIAILA Eo 3 oO agpipe iddle rna nkle gogo teeldrum ood Block iko lotom1 ntom verse et_Noise eath ashore esch T NO c GA I esch Wu l sech l lI cC oo 1 O DID o us 8 NO NO AN CO D T gt it ho A UD x Q elephone elicopter NO O T 28 Gunshott N VOICE 58 9 Tbone_Section Oberbass1 Muted Tpt2 Flugel Horn Brass2 Growbrass1 Brass5 Altosax Circus Blowed Tenor Mariachi Growbrass2 Blare Slide Tbone larinet n Flute oice Flute ynth14 JI NINININININIJ N O o OD O GO OD Ol IIco m O N Cc m O1 ex O1 D 6 GM Voices 77 Analogs 78 Flanger 79 Brightpad 80 Wiring 81 Synh23 synth22 ynth25 Fusion Synbass6 Synbass7 1 Bright Grand Rock amp Roll Ac GrandL Ac GrandR Ep Legend Twin Fm EpPhae Tine Soft Brightpad Crash Tubular Bell Vibes Kalimba Marimba ES C1 Glockpad E Peng Hamm Slow Hamm Fast Ke Gospel Slow Gospel Fast Jazz Fisa Diatonic Alpen Brazilian CountryFx MelobarFx StratoFx Fingered Gs O1 CO C2 a PNE 3 ES ES 6 7 8 9 10 EENE
94. E The folder will be created on the current position of the disk Figure 344 Press the F7 button DEL FOLDER to enable the delete folder function Press the USER 5 button EXECUTE to delete the folder or the EXIT button to cancel the operation 118 KETRON e AUDYA 7U ga Sa Qu Qu 90000 Figure 341 99000 Figure 342 K nnen Leva Veni m E Hamina ims le tii C ly Wa pace e mon all i e Ee Figure 344 Wt BE DC WR le no leg uiJ R Sapo Ta Mj Ino USB drive In addition to the internal disk you can also manage external drive such as pendrives hard disks CD players etc connected to any of the two USB connectors on the front side Once you have inserted a USB device into one of the two USB ports the USB drive will appear on the DISK menu as in Figure 345 The same functions in the DISK MENU are available also for the files and folders of the USB drive Search Audya features a useful SEARCH function in order to search files stored in the internal disk or in external USB devices B Searching a file 1 Press the SEARCH button 2 Thelast accessed directory of the internal disk will open Figure 346 3 Use the CURSOR A V or the DATA VALUE wheel and the ENTER button to locate a folder and to search inside 4 Digit the full name file or a part of it by inputting letter and numbers directly
95. E MODE main window is similar to Figure 138 From here you can choose 5 sections by using the USER buttons from 1 to 5 MODES USER 1 DRUM USER 2 BASS USER 3 CHORDS USER 4 LOWER USER 5 m MODES 1 By pressing the USER 1 button once you can access the first MODES window where you can see the following functions corresponding to the F1 F10 buttons F1 VOICE LIST TO STYLE F2 INTERACT GUITAR F3 PIANIST BASSIST F4 PIANIST SUSTAIN F5 PRESET MIX F6 AUTO FILL F AFTER FILL F8 FILL TO ARRANGE F9 CHORD MODE F10 ROOTLESS VOICE LIST TO STYLE When this function is ON it enables the Voice List to Style Figure 139 You can store for each Style besides the various parameters also the Voice List currently selected on the panel This function works only if the Voice List button is lit while the Style is running INTERACT GUITAR When the INTERACTIVE GUITAR function is ON you can set the dynamic value for the LIVE GUITAR part Figure 140 In other words by playing harder on the keyboard the arrangement of the guitar becomes an arpeggio By playing softer the guitar plays rhythmic chords PIANIST BASSIST Once selected by using the F3 button you can choose between two operative modes by using the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel for the PIANIST and BASSIST modes Figure 141 STANDARD this mode lets you freeze the recognized chord by using the Sustain Pedal so you can play the keyboard w
96. ER 5 button SAVE as shown in Figure 302 By using the F1 F10 buttons is now possible to select the User Preset from the list as shown in Figure 303 Setting a VOCALIZER effect 1 2 Press the VOCALIZER button The VOICETRON PRESETS window will appear Figure 304 that is the effects for the microphone connected to MICRO 1 on the rear Press the F1 F10 buttons to select one of the VOICETRON PRESETS Press the CURSOR gt buttons to scroll the VOICETRON PRESETS pages By using the F1 F10 buttons you can select 20 VOICETRON PRESETS from two pages PAGE1 F1 USER 1 F2 USER 2 F3 USER 3 F4 USER 4 F5 USER 5 F6 USER 6 F7 USER 7 F8 USER 8 F9 USER 9 10 MIDI MODE In Figure 305 you can see the VOICETRON PRESETS of the second page Please note that the last Preset corresponding to the F10 button on the second page is MIDI MODE shown by the arrow on Figure 305 that is the harmonization mode controlled by the MIDI file In this mode the harmonization is automatically controlled by the melody track of the MIDI file Please see Setting the VOCAL mode on the GM Parts section in this manual Voicetron Hj Bi Te DC BO Ino Ch ES Figure 302 EE Figure 303 JU NELE EN 7 Hi Stam nz KUTO TUNE SOIL AL STARCAR Tek F EZ D LI ome ng ome a CONTET DEI erao gaaer R 8 GART OET JAZT our Co EES me CH Qt oa RE P P Inno o0gg00
97. F activates the Player when a Style is running F4 KEY TUNE TO CHORD values ON OFF see procedure below F5 REG LOAD MODE loading behaviour of the right voice into the Registration when a style is playing Values Mode and Mode Mode the right voice is changed immediately by loading the registration Mode2 the right voice is changed by the effective change of the Registration that is at the beginning of the next measure WAV DJ MIX function When the WAV DJ MIX function is ON you can use the two Players together 1 Select a file WAVE Press ENTER or START Select another WAVE file and press ENTER The second WAVE file will be pre loaded Press the DJ Loop button to cue the second Player the LEDs are blinking Press the USER 4 button CONTINUE to start the second Wave file 7 Adjust the two sources output by using the WAVE and DJ LOOP faders as you like Ol ee I D KEY TUNE TO CHORD function When the Key Tune To Chord is active you can start a Key Tune by using the associated key but also by using the recognition of the associated chord Here s an example 1 Press the KEY TUNE button on the panel and select a Key Tune Figure 266 2 Press the EDIT button on the panel 3 Press the USER 2 button Tune View to view the associated keys to the Key Tune In Figure 267 there are 3 associated keys 4 For example if you want to start the song Barocco wav you can play the C3 note assi
98. F5 Slide Time time of the Slide effect values 0 100 F6 Bend Value Bend value of the Slide effect values 12 semitones F7 Aft amp Port Autoswitch enables disables the automatic activation of the Portamento and the Aftertouch when they are set within a PROGRAM EXPR PEDAL By pressing the F4 button on the KEYBOARD CONTROL page you can access the settings for the EXPRESSION PEDAL Figure 256 that is the pedal to control the expression connected on the rear panel F1 Pedal Curve adjustment of the pedal curve behaviour values NORMAL USER1 and USER2 F2 Expr To Song expression control of the song currently playing in the Player values ON OFF F3 Swell To Right expression control on the right hand values ON OFF F4 Swell To Player expression control on Player values OFF ALL WAV 1 WAV 2 MP3 1 MP3 2 ACCORDION By pressing the F5 button on the KEYBOARD CONTROL page you can access the settings for ACCORDION Figure 257 connected via MIDI F1 Mode values Intern Belgiq that is International and Belgian F2 Left Velocity adjustment of the left hand Velocity response You can set the values by pressing repeatedly the F2 button and by using the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel values 0 63 Soft1 Soft2 Normal Hard1 Hard2 F3 Right Velocity adjustment of the right hand Velocity response You can set the values by pressing repeatedly the F2 button and by using the CURS
99. FFECTS similar to Figure 319 will appear from which you can edit the parameters of the REVERB and ECHO effects Select the parameter by using the CURSOR A V buttons Hi and edit the value of the 3 parameters by using the DATA VALUE wheel The three parameters are So EFFECTS SEND values 0 63 eg a REVERB PRESET see the list at left DH CH CH E CERN CH ECHO PRESET see the list at right Figure 319 REVERB PRESET ECHO PRESET Short Room Small Hall iii co Large Hall tereo 3 4 OS Z em rc Short Plate go MS lt 9 Vocal Plate tereo 4 4 om pg Le ge eeng anc ono Triplet xe Cathedral tereo Triplet EX FI Fi oOo PI Ff f Gated Reverb UUUVUOUUVUUNM Figure 320 tereo 4 4 Tap ono Triplet Tap tereo Triplet Tap ser1 Cu E Er E fr es a d 0 CJ EI E E U B VOCAL TO ARR Figure 321 By selecting the F10 button the VOCAL TO ARR screen like Figure 320 will appear where you can edit the parameters of this function The function allows di Hi to set automatically a VOCALIZER effect associated CAR wes we u0J to the part played by the Arranger For example you Ho ee DEI e Je can set a DUET effect for the START a TRIO effect SIE Eeer gd Je for the variation A of the Arranger a VOCODER effect om P T am urb cin di for the variation B of the Arranger and so on You can make the choice of the part by using the CURSOR A W buttons while the effect to assign can be selected
100. Figure 278 Play the keyboard and or sing on your microphone connected to the MICRO 1 connector enable the MICRO button in the VOICETRON section Press the USER 4 button STOP REC to stop recording If you stop recording before the MIDI file ends press the START STOP button on the panel A wave format file with the same name of the MIDI file plus a progressive numbering and the WAV extension will be created In the example the file is Cabaret_1 wav You will find it in the MIDIFILE folder Figure 279 Also you can overdub using the same MIDI file and the newly created audio file Repeat the procedure from step 3 to step 6 After overdubbing you will find your audio files with progressive numbering that means Cabaret_2 wav Cabaret_3 wav and so on Figure 280 Once the MIDI sync is created and played back remember that only two tracks will play in numeric order e g 1and 20r 2and 3 if 1is not present by pressing the SAVE button a pop up with two options appears F1 Save Sync Param it allows to save the information of the sync into the MIDI file so the next time you play the file it s not necessary to reload them You cannot change the audio file after you saved the sync information because you will loose the synchronization F2 Merge Audio Track it combines the current two tracks playing in one audio track This option appears only if you have 2 WAV tracks playing Once the files are m
101. GUITAR voice is e H loaded onto the memory location corresponding KE Lh enee e to the F1 button Figure 4 C z Q z OQ z J iz Figure 3 B Selecting more INS voices R 1 Press the RAM INS SUPERSOLO button of the third row in the VOICE section The display will show a list of the INS voices stored on the hard disk 2 Select one voice by using the CURSOR A V 3 Press the SELECT button that appears on the display next to the USER 5 button A dot will CHAAAR mna EE 3 Ors Legty Chr Jul rgt i pem Liane LH d be LI H Unger LS H O appear before the name of the selected INS CH ves voice Repeat the choice in order to select more Qa e dde we B g INS voices by using the CURSOR A V and the Het Pe e ATE SELECT button Figure 5 4 Press the ENTER button to load in the memory E M me p location all the selected INS voices In the s z OQ CJ z CJ example five INS voices have been loaded in the S r ries first five memory locations corresponding to the igure F1 F5 buttons Figure 6 For advanced operations about the INS voices see on page 74 7 im uiJj m g The INS voices appear on the display with an asterisk For example DJIANGO ins If you try to load one voice already loaded in memory this will not be loaded twice The RAM INS indication next to the SUPERSOLO button means that the INS voices will be loaded into memory temporarily For this reason when you power
102. LEFT GM REVERB you can access the page for the selection of the reverb for the left hand and the GM parts Figure 230 The available reverb Preset are the same of those for the right hand seen before To lock the reverb also when changing Program or Registration or at start up press the Lock ON button corresponding to the USER 1 button as shown by the arrow on Figure 230 After the effect type selection exit by pressing the EXIT button or directly by pressing the MENU button USER REVERB When you select the reverb for the right hand or the left hand and the GM parts you can choose one of the 5 USER REVERBS Figure 231 corresponding to the F6 F10 buttons of the second REVERB page By pressing the EDIT button on the front panel you can customize the user reverbs and store them as User Rev1 User Rev2 User Rev3 User Rev4 and User Rev5 The Figure 232 shows the parameters of User Rev1 that you can modify by using the F1 F10 buttons and the CURSOR a gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel F1 User Rev choose from 1 to 5 F2 LEVEL reverb level values 0 63 F3 TIME reverb time values 0 63 F4 THESHOLD GATE threshold of gate values 0 63 F5 HIGH DAMP high frequencies damp values 0 63 F ALGORITHM algorithm type ong Long2 Medium Short1 Short2 By pressing the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together you set the value to 0 After you set the parameters you can to store the custom reverb by pressing the U
103. LUTE ai ORAN STAGE VERBA PR acm z z O z z Figure 202 dE 212 5 kcal PETT VORCE mer E per VONCE mere ver EI LO ZF bit HOEG z z s z g Figure 203 ALORA TERCR att Bu Seege Lat rur Steg H Voice List Plu BE 00 o no DREI Vert m de ub Leite Tee ger ver Bee Leem voa __ Ptr we EMETY WCE PTY vert per WOKE oa Ga Go 0o Q a 6000000 z z O z z Figure 204 TMERERPDS rYm minu Lebe aw uL EAF hh Ta Paie Ri Li AE IRC L zi FETE mwm L ELEC FS BLECTRK Pr P SECH Shah tht E ADA We c riw Ede 205 KETRON e AUDYA 5 Menu By pressing the MENU button on the front panel you can access the MENU main page Figure 206 Here you can find many edit pages where to set the keyboard The F1 F9 buttons will open the following pages F1 LANGUAGE F2 MIDI F3 DSP FA KEYBOARD CONTROL F5 OUTPUT ASSIGN F6 METRONOME CLICK F VIDEO MODE F8 AUDIO RECORDING F9 MIDI RECORDING B LANGUAGE e Press the F1 button LANGUAGE for the selection of the system language Figure 207 By using the F1 F10 buttons you can set the following languages F1 ENGLISH F2 FRANGAIS French F3 DEUTSCH German FA ESPANOL Spanish F5 PORTUGAIS Portuguese F6 ITALIANO Italian F SVENSKA Swedish F8 NORSK Norwegian F9 TU RKCE Turkish Once the language is set exit from MENU by using
104. N VIEW window will have the following functions USER 1 PAUSE CONTINUE USER 2 STOP USER 3 LEAD ON OFF melody mute USER 4 EXIT exit from the Lyric or MAIN VIEW window KETRON e AUDYA 3D Program Program For each button of the VOICES section you can create and store a PROGRAM sound You can modify a PROGRAM by pressing the EDIT button and a button of the VOICES section B Creating a PROGRAM 1 Press the PROGRAM button 2 Press a button of the VOICES section for example PIANO The current PROGRAM will appear Figure 62 You can also insert an INS instrument already loaded in memory see RAM INS SUPERSOLO section on page 74 3 Press the EDIT button The parameters of the current PROGRAM will be displayed Figure 63 4 The F1 F10 buttons allow the selection of the parameters of the PROGRAM as explained later F1 F6 VOICES By pressing the F1 or F6 buttons you will highlight repeatedly one of three voices that you can assign to the same PROGRAM In the example the first voice selected is CLAVINET while the reamaining two voices are inactive OFF Once you have highlighted one of three VOICES of the PROGRAM you can rotate the DATA VALUE wheel or press the CURSOR buttons to select an instrument available from the GM banks Figure 64 For example you can choose an instrument for each VOICE from the PIANO bank as follows e Grand Piano e Concert L e Concert Grand e Concert R e Rock amp Roll e Ac Gran
105. NTER and EXIT buttons as described for the WAVE screen The SFX tracks are particular tracks containing special effects to be used in different situations including applause orchestral hits snare rolls and many more This Player can play back MP3s with max 192 Kb s bitrate e does not support joint stereo formats B MIDI The MIDI button enables the MIDI screen where you start playback of the selected MIDI file Figure 23 The fader below adjusts the volume of the MIDI file To navigate in this screen use the cursor buttons the ENTER and EXIT buttons as described for the WAVE screen When a MIDI track is playing and the lyric is shown because you pressed LYRIC ON you can go back to the list of the MIDI files by pressing the EXIT button or the F2 button LYRIC OFF Bm Making a MIX The Player allows the single track playback or the MIX playback of two or more tracks at the same time up to four audio tracks and one MIDI track simultaneously MIX a WAVE file and one MP3 1 Press the WAVE button 2 Select an audio file from the WAVE folder 3 Press the START button USER 5 or the ENTER button or the START button on the panel 4 The WAVE track starts playback and its LED flashes 22 KETRON e AUDYA om go Qu e ca go go 5000000 Ch u run i cm Lee SE D s ge a Se L QOQQOU Figure 21 999398 fue 23 Ei BG p B0 Ino Pl Bi Te DC o nc Ei
106. O1 92 Stick01 93 Close02 94 Open 95 Reverse 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tom06 30 RideO1 78 Cuica01 o UJ O O o I Drum Set 51 Ride03 52 Crash03 153 Ridebell0i 53 RidebellO1 54 TambourineO1 56 CowbellO1 58 Vibraslap 59 RideO1 60 Bongo Hi 61 Bongo Low 09 Empt Lightpop Program Change 58 14 Snare001 62 Conga Slap 15 RollO1 63 Conga_Hi 16 Roll02 4 Conga_Low 5 Timbales_Hi 18 Snare003 6 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 7 Agogo HI 20 Snare005 8 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 9 Cabasa 22 Tom FlamO1 0 Maracas01 23 Tom FlamO2 1 WhistleO1 2 Whistle02 25 Snare007 3 Guiro01 26 Fingsnap 01 4 Guiro02 5 Caves 28 Snare008 GW Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 7 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 8 Cuica01 31 SticksO1 9 Cuica02 32 Click O TriangleO1 33 Metronome 01 1 Triangle02 2 Shaker01 35 Kick36 3 Shaker02 36 Kick02 4 SticksO2 5 Clap 38 Snare078 6 TambourineO2 39 Clap03 7 RimshotO2 40 Snare080 8 SnareO11 9 Snare012 O Snare013 43 Tom08 1 Stick03 44 Stick08 2 MiddleO2 45 Tom09 3 OpenO2 4 Close02 5 Reverse 6 Applause 49 Crash02 7 Belltree 50 Tom12 8 Empt 51 RideO1 9 Empt 52 Crash03 0 Empt 53 RidebellO1 1 Empt O O O O O T h Lesch 02 Empt 55 Crash04 03 Empt 56 Cowbell01 04 Empt 57 Crash05 05 Empt 58 Vibraslap 06 Empt 59 Rided2 07 Empt 60 Bongo Hi 08 Empt 61 Bongo Low 09 Empt Rap Program Change 59 62 Conga Slap 15 RollO1 63 Conga Hi 16 Rollo2 17 Snare002
107. OFF the INS voices will not be retained in memory m J CH CH CH KC Figure 6 KETRON 0 AUDYA 15 Selecting voices Adding a second voice to the right hand 2nd VOICE Press the 2nd VOICE button on the third row in the VOICE section According to the PRESET or PROGRAM voice you will add a second voice to the sound of the right hand Note that the 2nd VOICE voices can be freely programmed by the user in any PROGRAM Press the EDIT button and the USER 2 button to open the 2nd VOICE page Figure 7 For more details on how to create edit a PROGRAM see on page 36 Selecting the organ DRAWBARS Press the DRAWBARS button on the third row in the VOICE section The display will show the organ DRAWBARS screen Figure 8 Select one organ by using the F1 F10 buttons ORGAN1 ORGANZ etc Press the CURSOR button lt 4 to select the second page of DRAWBARS ORGAN11 ORGAN12 etc Press the USER 1 button PedToRotor below the display to control the ROTOR by using one external SUSTAIN pedal By pressing the pedal repeatedly you can toggle ROTOR SLOW ROTOR FAST If PedToRotor is disabled the SUSTAIN pedal returns to its ordinary function Use the fader controls in the MIXER section page 20 to set the nine footages of the organ DRAWBARS 16 8 5 1 3 4 2 2 3 2 1 3 5 1 1 3 1 Figure 9 shows the exact correspondence of the nine faders of the mixer section and the nine DRAWBARS disp
108. OR lt 4 gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel values 0 63 Soft1 Soft2 Normal Hard1 Hard2 F4 Left Drum drum on the right hand values ON OFF F5 Autochord automatic chords values ON OFF F6 Bass Sustain sustain for the bass values 0 63 F7 Bass To Chord bass to chord values ON OFF F8 Bass Octave bass octave values 2 octaves F9 Lower1 Octave Lower1 part octave values 2 octaves F10 Lower2 Octave Lower1 part octave values 2 octaves Oa Ke ga Ja go go b oobcoo Figure 255 e Hu gua row O om A 5 D Ze O 206588 Figure 256 TLN Wt Ss DI kent gaan e Ee chard mee u LI ga 00 pe Geck Jesse na O D Zune im mU D b xx 0009569688 Figure 257 Press the USER 1 button ACTIVE INACTIVE to activate the ACCORDION parameters Once you set the parameters you can to store the ACCORDION parameters by pressing the USER 5 button SAVE or the SAVE button on the front panel A brief SAVE DATA TO DISK message will appear LEFT DRUM By pressing the USER 3 button on the ACCORDION page as shown by the arrow on Figure 257 you can access the LEFT DRUM page where to set percussive instruments for the left hand see next page KETRON e AUDYA 91 By using the F1 F10 buttons from the LEFT DRUM page Figure 258 you can set the percussive instruments for the left hand F1 Bass Drum Instr 1 percussive instrum
109. PanderoO3 78 Cuica01 31 Kick40 79 Cuica02 32 Kick39 80 TriangleO1 33 Tom19 81 TriangleO2 34 Metronome 02 82 ShakerO1 35 Kick32 83 Shaker02 36 Kick04 84 Sticks02 37 Rimshot11 85 Castagnet 38 Snare009 86 Tambourine02 39 ClapO1 87 Rimshot03 40 SnareO11 88 Snare009 41 Tom07 89 Snare012 42 Stick02 90 Snare028 43 Tom08 91 GuiraO1 44 Close01 92 Guira02 45 Tom09 93 Tambora01 46 Open 94 Tambora02 47 Tom10 95 Tambora03 48 Tom11 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Cowbell03 50 Tom12 98 Empt 51 Ride03 99 Empt 52 Crash03 00 Clap07 53 RidebellO1 01 Clap08 54 TambourineO1 02 Empt 55 Crash04 03 Empt 56 CowbellO1 04 Empt 57 Crash05 05 Empt 54 TambourineO1 02 Empt 55 Crash04 03 Empt 56 CowbellO1 04 Empt 57 Crash05 05 Empt 53 RidebellO1 01 Empt 58 Vibraslap 06 Empt 59 RideO2 07 Empt 60 Bongo Hi 08 Empt 61 Bongo Low 09 Empt Street Program Change 74 14 Snare001 15 RollO1 16 Roll02 4 Conga Low 17 Snare002 5 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 6 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 20 Snare005 8 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 9 Cabasa 22 Tom Flam O Maracas01 23 Tom Flam02 1 WhistleO1 2 Whistle02 25 Snare007 3 Guiro01 4 Guiro02 5 Caves 28 Snare008 6 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 7 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 31 SticksO1 i 32 Click O Triangle01 O O O O OO e eS e el Keele IRSE IS EO LOO O D e NO 33 Metronome 01 1 Triangled2 2 Shaker01 3 Shaker02 36 Kick25 4 Sticks02 37 Rimshot15 38 Snare073 6 TambourineO2 39 Clap05 7 Rimshot12 4
110. SER 5 button SAVE or the SAVE button on the front panel A brief SAVE DATA TO DISK message will appear CHORUS By pressing the F2 button on the DSP page you can access the CHORUS screen as shown in Figure 233 Here you can select the following parameters F1 CHORUS RIGHT selection of the Chorus for the right hand opens another window F2 CHORUS LEFT GM selection of the Chorus for the left hand and the GM parts opens another window F6 Right Level settings of the Chorus level for the right hand values 0 63 F7 Left GM Level settings of the Chorus level for the left hand and the GM parts values 0 63 99000 Figure 230 99000 Figure 231 RH R DC Sao Gam RR Ui BC Se Je 0j Sao iar Aa ga CS u Qu xx SKS CHORI fs SEA CHOR PS LEFT FOR D D ES ded Figure 232 acre Lee CH Rechte i HEED s Figure 233 KETRON e AUDYA 83 oo0ogocOoc Ch Wi DC B0 Inc CHORUS RIGHT From the CHORUS page by pressing the F1 button CHORUS RIGHT you can access the page for the selection of the Chorus for the right hand Figure 234 10 Chorus Presets are available in the first page and 10 in the second by pressing any CURSOR button or the DATA VALUE wheel Press any F1 F10 button to select the corresponding Chorus type Chorus1 Chorus2 Chorus6 Tremolo1 Tremolo2 and Tremolos Phaser1 Phaser2 a
111. SLOW or speed up FAST the tempo of the Arranger By pressing the two buttons simultaneously you will set the T Lock function that is Tempo Lock To restore the original tempo of the style press the lt lt and buttons simultaneously in the RECORD section HOLD By pressing the HOLD button the accompaniment of the Arranger will play even if you release all the keys from the keyboard If HOLD is disabled when you release the keys from the keyboard the accompaniment of the Arranger will stop playing except the drum part KETRON e AUDYA 13 Selecting voices Selecting voices You can find three rows of eight buttons each in the VOICE section on the front panel The first two rows allow the selection of the voice families ordered by a common use see a full list of the voices at the end of this manual PIANO EL PIANO CHROM ORGAN ACCORDION GUITAR BASS STRINGS EFFECT CHOIR BRASS SAX FLUTE PAD SYNTH ETHNIC SFX ZND GM PROGRAM MOLE VOICE RAM INS DRAWBAHS Kala Liles DOUBLE HARMONY PRESET USER Eiladibinin The third row contains the PROGRAM button and other voices selection buttons Moreover there are also the DOUBLE HARMONY buttons B Selecting a basic voice 1 Select one voice family by pressing one of the 16 buttons on the first two rows in the VOICE section Q rs Men x BI Le For example press the PIANO family button Ke EE The first page showing the first ten available Ju ele R voi
112. Tenor atin Bariton Lee m Lead2 ynth24 nth6 ynth7 ariachi JJ D lt lt lt lt cH i CD Lu CO c lt CD ide Horns nth9 lugel Horn nth12 ana ynth13 NS Alo mioiz wize lili LI p D O ct O 2 CD N DRUMSET i rush Gm2 rchestra Gm2 rchestra tudio 8 ightPop Rap Modern C1 O LD lt be ad ch LO Church Detune Synbrass4 Bass amp Piano1 Bass amp Piano2 U 2izio Ole Olio Olio ale Q lech O f 5 NO an Flute azz Slide mooth Country C ech ech O ps D Q ng_Chin ynth2 nth3 oor Bell2 Key Hammer CD Co CD ynth20 ynth5 CD olwlwlninlwlal gt walo Sa o 3 9 o lt 9 8 5 Z z D Q S r5 oF Q nO Q o NIO O1 J Q Short Perc 1 Brazilian Slide antasy NO JI CO CO CO Co co CO O O0 mb Eb Rb bb O C2 01 gt Nh cC oo 1 Oo O1 Co I9 Q cO yn bassi 4 N DRUMSET ustom atin opJazz treet Analog Citypop Smooth Aci Kick amp Snare JazzBrush Swing Garage U S Pop MeloRap runge 01 NIN O op 7 7 7 7 7 i 6 7 1 8 8 2 3 4 Garage U S Pop 84 MeloRap N Wo 7 O g O sch Melotom2 Q xplosion ire_Alarm oot Splash oot Steps unshot2 Gunshot3 Heart Castanets Horse Horse Gallop et Laughin
113. Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom Flam 70 MaracasO01 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleO1 ILL Iesch Iesch Iesch Lesch Iesch Iesch esch e m 3 144 KETRON e AUDYA 24 CrashO1 72 WhistleO2 75 Claves01 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 31 SticksO1 32 Click 80 TriangleO1 33 Metronome O1 81 Triangled2 82 Shaker01 35 KickO2 83 ShakerO2 36 Kick35 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshot08 85 ClapO3 38 Snare019 86 Tambourine02 39 Clap03 87 Rimshot08 40 Snare062 88 Snare034 89 Snare077 90 Kick08 43 Tom08 91 Kick13 44 Close 92 Kick10 45 Tom09 93 Stick07 46 MiddleO2 94 Middle06 95 Reverse 48 Tom11 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 51 RideO1 52 Crash03 53 RidebellO1 101 Empt 56 CowbellO1 58 Vibraslap 59 Rided2 60 Bongo Hi 161 Bongo Low 109 Empt Smooth Program Change 77 62 Conga Slap 15 RollO1 63 Conga Hi 6 Roll02 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom FlamO1 70 Maracas01 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleO1 72 Whistle02 25 Snare007 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 31 SticksO1 32 Click 80 TriangleO1 33 Metronome O1 81 Triangled2 82 Shaker01 35 Kick35 83 Shaker02 36 Kick32 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshot16 85 ClapO2 38 Snare083 86 Tambourine02 39 Clap06 87 Rimsho
114. UE wheel you can assign 36 semitones transposition value in 1 semitone steps By pressing the CURSOR lt 4 gt together you set the default value that is no transposition F1 Right F2 Left F3 Bass F4 Lower1 F5 Lower2 F6 Chord1 F7 Chord2 F8 Chord3 F9 Chord4 F10 Chord5 80 KETRON e AUDYA Ui DI LJ J J m CH Ta Figure 220 iJ R o0000009 Figure 221 0969599699 Figure 222 0969599699 Figure 223 B UTILITY From the first screen of the MIDI menu by pressing the F4 button the UTILITY page will open as shown in Figure 224 Here you can set the following parameters by pressing directly the F1 F10 buttons e F1 SOFT THRU enables the MIDI Thru The MIDI data to MIDI IN port will be transmitted thru the MIDI Out port e F2 MIDI CLOCK IN enables the MIDI clock reception e F3 MIDI CLOCK OUT enables the MIDI clock transmission e FA LOCAL enables the Local On Off function of the keyboard In Local Off you will not hear any sound e F5 MIDI PORT IN GM enables the MIDI IN 1 or 2 port for the General MIDI data reception e F6 USB MIDI OUT enables the MIDI transmission from USB port e F7 GM2 MODE enables the General MIDI 2 mode e F8 GLOBAL GM TX enables the General MIDI transmission e F9 MIDI IN SEND TO enables the data transmission from MIDI IN port to MIDI out 1 or 2 port USB MIDI OUT When you can activate the USB MIDI OUT mode from the UTILITY page i
115. V KE a fnm n ET Le deme Lo Hue i F 00 B PRS fa i s z 9 z s Figure 209 s z Q QU Figure 210 roma SECH T eg ri EEN dnd des el omm uM d PLE s z z QU Figure Zen EN Bi 00 B0 Sapo EN ra 00 eo nt To return to the previous MENU page press the EXIT button on the front panel To exit the MENU window without saving changes press the MENU button KETRON e AUDYA General Master1 Master2 Accord Accord You can save the MIDI settings in five Preset assigned to the USER buttons from 1 to 5 General General Preset Master1 Master Keyboard Preset Master2 Second Master Keyboard Preset Accord1 MIDI accordion Preset Accord2 Second MIDI accordion Preset The Figure 212 shows the Master2 page USER 2 button The following explanation refers to the General Preset The procedure for the Master1 Master Accord1 and Accord2 Presets are identical Saving the MIDI settings To store the MIDI settings press the SAVE button on the front panel A brief SAVE MIDI Setting message will appear If you do not save the MIDI settings the previous settings will return at next keyboard start up FILTER PROG CHANGE TX From the first screen of the MIDI menu by pressing the F2 button a window will appear where to set the Program Change transmission filter Figure 213 By using the buttons F1 10 you can select the parts to fi
116. WhistleO1 72 Whistle02 73 Guiro01 74 Guiro02 75 Claves01 28 Snare008 o 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica01 31 SticksO1 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleO1 33 Metronome O1 81 IriangleO2 82 Shaker01 35 Kick18 83 Shaker02 36 Kick09 84 SticksO2 85 Castagnet 38 Snare019 86 TambourineO02 39 ClapO1 87 Rimshot02 40 Snare020 88 SnareO11 89 Snare012 42 Stick08 90 Snare013 91 MiddleO1 44 Stick10 92 Stick02 93 Close02 46 OpenO5 94 OpenO2 95 Reverse 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tom06 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica01 O c RV o RV D RV o UJ O O o I 146 KETRON e AUDYA 51 RideO1 52 Crash03 53 RidebellO1 54 TambourineO1 56 CowbellO1 104 Empt 57 Crash05 105 Empt 55 Crash04 103 Empt 58 Vibraslap 106 Empt 59 Rided2 60 Bongo Hi 161 Bongo Low 109 Empt U S Pop Program Change 83 14 Snare001 62 Conga Slap 15 RollO1 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom FlamO1 70 Maracas01 23 Tom FlamO2 71 WhistleO1 72 Whistle02 73 Guiro01 26 Fingsnap 01 74 Guiro02 75 Claves01 28 Snare008 76 W_Block_Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica01 31 StickO5 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleO1 33 Metronome 01 81 Triangled2 82 Shaker01 35 Kick01 83 Shaker02 36 Kick54 84 SticksO2 85 Clap04 38 Snare079 86 Tambourine02 39 Clap03 87 Rimshot
117. _ 57 Crasho5 105 Empty 00 00 OO 109 CO KETRON 0 AUDYA 143 Drum Set 91 Kick17 92 Kick18 93 Stick08 46 MiddleO2 94 Middle06 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tom25 51 Crash02 52 Crash03 53 RidebellO1 54 TambourineO1 55 Crash04 56 Cowbell01 58 Vibraslap 106 Empt 59 Rided2 60 Bongo Hi Analog Program Change 75 62 Conga Slap 15 RollO1 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom FlamO1 70 MaracasO01 23 Tom FlamO2 71 WhistleO1 72 WhistleO2 25 Snare007 73 Guiro01 74 Guiro02 75 ClavesO1 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica01 31 SticksO1 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleO1 33 Metronome O1 81 IriangleO2 82 Shaker01 35 Kick23 83 Shaker02 36 Kick24 84 SticksO2 37 RimshotO1 85 Clap10 38 Snare087 86 Tambourine02 39 Clap10 87 RimshotO1 40 Snare031 88 Snare059 89 Snare074 42 Stick16 90 Snare034 91 Kick17 44 Stick11 92 Kick15 93 Middle05 46 OpenO6 94 Stick13 95 Reverse 48 Tom30 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 98 Empt 51 RideO05 99 Empt 52 Crash03 00 Empt 53 RidebellO1 01 Empt 54 TambourineO1 02 Empt 03 Empt 56 CowbellO1 04 Empt 05 Empt 58 Vibraslap 59 Ride03 07 Empt 60 Bongo Hi 08 Empt 61 Bongo Low 09 Empt Citypop Program Change 76 14 Snare001 62 Conga Slap 15 RollO1 63 Conga_Hi 16 Roll02 17 Snare002 65
118. age where to make the keyboard settings Figure 252 By using the F1 F10 buttons you can access the following pages F1 PITCH VOL TRANS Pitch Bend Master Tune Master Volume Keyb Transpose Player Transpose Lock and Right Boost Level settings F2 MODULATION Modulation Wheel sensitivity settings F3 AFTERTOUCH Aftertouch settings F4 EXPR PEDAL expression pedal settings F5 ACCORDION Accordion MIDI parameters settings F6 VEL CURVE keyboard dynamic curve setting F VEL FILTER dynamic filter response setting F8 ARABIC Arabian scale settings F9 FOOTSWITCH footswitch settings F10 UTILITY utility page for the following parameters e SPDIF In Out Edit Value Recycle Fast Song e Show File Icon e Intelligent Transpose e 2nd Right Tab Remix Live Guitar Headphone to Out3 amp 4 e Video Lyric PITCH VOL TRANS By pressing the F1 button on the KEYBOARD CONTROL page you can access the settings of the following parameters Figure 253 F1 Master Tune master tuning of the keyboard 440 Hz reference 100 F2 Master Volume master volume of the keyboard values 16 63 Not for the AUDIO parts F3 Bend Gens Pitch Bend sensitivity values 0 24 semitones to O that is no Pitch Bend effect F4 Keyb Only Transpose keyboard transposition only values ON OFF If set to ON the transposition affects the keyboard and not the song of the Player F5 Player Transpose Lock transposition lock on the Player
119. atus draws nominal non operating power from the AC outlet with its STANDBY ON in the Standby posi tion No live flame like candles lights must be placed on this apparatus All electrical and electronic products should be disposed of separately from the municipal waste stream via designated collection facilities appointed by the government or the local authorities The correct disposal of your old appliance will help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health For more detailed information about disposal of your old appliance please contact your city office waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product USER STYLE CROSSFADE REGISTRATION DISK PLAY LIST KETRON e AUDYA 3 Table of contents Introductton KKK KKK KKK KKK ENK za KRAN 5 Main features 5 TOD ge TE 6 ENEE NETT 7 USB connectors on the front side 7 AUDIO connections eere 8 Connections eese nnne nnn 8 MIDI conpnecton ern 9 VIDEO connectlofi rte tonno nes 10 USB Connection 10 Display and function keys 12 Brei c V EO 12 F1 F2 F3 F9 and F10 function buttons 12 Beef te La E E Arranger Conductor buttons 13 Selecting voices 14 Selecting VOICES sannnoonnnoannnnennnonnnnrnnnnnnnenne 14 Selecting the Style
120. ault value Parameter MSB LSB MSB Soft reset sets most of the vocalizer parameters to their default value all notes off The following parameters are reset pan Control 10 expression Control 11 portamento Controls 5 amp 65 pitch bend lead harmony switches System NRPN 5 to 7 voice transform controls System NRPN 17 harmony formant amp tone controls Harmony NRPN 11 to 25 vibrato Harmony NRPN 26 to 45 humanization Harmony NRPN 46 to 50 158 KETRON e AUDYA Specifications o A gt e Q DI eh DI KEYBOARD 76 semi weighed buttons 8 dynamic curves Pitch modulation aftertouch and portamento controls Operating system updatable via USB port 17 volume slider controls with 1 assignable 10 assignable user tab functions DISPLAY 320x240 pixel TFT colour graphic display HARD DISK 80 GB ATA 2 5 2 USB host 1 USB device MASS STORAGE USB sticks USB floppy disks MP3 players CD ROM and DVD ROM HD DEVICES Lo O c Z J 360 MB PCM wavetable 32 MB rewritable by user 384 Orchestral presets Stereo and multi layer GENERATION Voices 512 GM2 sounds 32 parts multitimbral POLYPHONY Up to 320 custom sound locations ORGAN DRAWBARS 9 digital drawbars slow fast rotor percussion and overdrive PROGRAMS 320 programs 3 Voices layered 3 splits Functions sustain portamento velocity switch duet trio morphing steel slide harmony Editing ADSR cut off resonan
121. azazwawawawananunanwnwawawanununa 120 UU BEEN 122 Audio A KE 123 Groove Bank Drum 2 125 Bass Bank Aa 127 AE Ee 128 BUSCO 129 AUDYA FACTORY STYLES ee 130 DUNT Seb secididbuciac tendit Dents Roa arn imd KR 133 MIDI Implementation 150 C ntrol Chang NER TO 151 Non Registered Parameter Numbers 152 Specifications 159 Technical data oue trece bei c dads iode eese 159 Thank you for purchasing Ketron Audya Advanced Music Station In this User Manual you can find the descriptions of all the main functions to get started by using the keyboard Before using the unit we strongly recommend you to read this manual thoroughly to ensure that you understand the operation of its many useful and convenient functions After you have finished reading this manual please keep it in a safe place for future reference Main features Audya is the new state of the art arranger keyboard by Ketron featuring many advanced functions designed for live entertainment and professional use It offers a powerful audio multiplayer a very high quality sound engine and an unique automatic accompaniment arranger Audya includes a versatile video support separate audio connections and three USB ports to connect to a computer and other storage devices m New sounds and Supersolo voices Following the Best Natural Sounds tradition by Ketron Au
122. be selected by using the F1 F10 buttons The options will be highlighted by an asterisk Figure 171 F1 Arab Scale Arabian scale settings F2 Drm Mixer Drum Mixer settings GM Part Ma NI I i xd diii Fer bee el ar Tr m m Jee maa m B uus creo uM Mee en ABA minan Le lees o LE LET oh gea abs Er om LI H Lg oe ana een Hi ei wkl Te Q D em KN ng L TT m xr d C EE bi U ER EN E D Fa g Figure 169 HI 00 Sao o0goOcooO Figure 170 a F e Ut 7 a om te E SS RI ge E E han 907 zz c E XE e LL m o00009009 Figure 171 Volume Reverb and Chorus of each part Right hand instrument Single drum instruments settings of the drum e g muting some of them into the MIDI file F3 Part Param GM part parameters F4 Song Param Song parameters F5 Song Tempo Song tempo setting F6 Lead Chan Lead channel F7 Right Param Right hand parameters F8 Song Trans Song transposition F9 Glob Trans Globale transposition F10 Keyb Trans Keyboard transposition Only for an example in each MIDI file you can store Tempo settings modified by the TEMPO SLOW FAST buttons Keyboard transposition semitones and or octaves Song transposition MIDI file parts transposition Before storing the MIDI file you can choose the GLOBAL or INITIAL option by using the USER 1 button and the REMOVE option by using the USER 3 but
123. by using the current MIDI file playing and select a style Now you can change the style during the REMIX This operation can be useful to find the right style to combine with the MIDI file OgoOOOO MIDI Remix 7 EDIDI snap ag rei one Pel t j d via S kh mk fi a i re ul Bh I E VO US Pen 5p Hess J eg F Pi Eccri mid T EEN Pharm uem Lom ui go RE BC FRO Las keem e em RERIN Fi ES Ino Figure 290 lt lt RECORD p gt STYLE REMIX MIDI L ORIG TEMPO cl Figure 291 KETRON 0 AUDYA 103 Voicetron Voicetron Once you connect two microphones to the MICRO 1 and MICRO 2 connectors you can access to a bunch of options for the voice treatment B MICRO The MICRO button enables the MICRO 1 input and MICRO 2 input Connect one or two microphones to the jacks on the rear and adjust the level by using the GAIN 1 and GAIN 2 wheels B VOCALIZER The VOCALIZER button enables the effect processor for the harmonization and the automatic pitch only on MICRO 1 Setting a vocal effect 1 Press the MICRO button 2 The MICRO PRESETS window will appear Figure 292 3 Press the F1 F10 buttons to select one of the MICRO PRESETS that is one effect for the microphone connected to MICRO 1 and or MICRO 2 4 Press the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons to scroll the MICRO PRESETS pages By using the F1 F10 buttons you can select 20 MICRO PRESETS from two pag
124. can press the ENTER button to start the file In Figure 326 is SOLO TROMBONE WAV By pressing the EXIT button on the front panel you can change the search folder on the disc By pressing the USER 5 button EXIT as shown by the arrow on Figure 327 you can exit the search function and return to the ordinary MAIN VIEW window 112 KETRON e AUDYA o000009 000009 Irj et rL D LA Kc string GRAND PIANO uu 1 Bess mp i Eram may 1 a Pave Tem wor Sei L Ze LL a GCKAKKKK z s z z Figure 327 Wi Bi Te IBC IQ Jut Bi Te ag no Ei Wu uc 95 B0 BC iG Wi BC ei Je B0 ac IQ ui BT Te 00 ao iG User Assignable By pressing the USER ASSIGNABLE button located to left of the display you can access the screen where to assign custom functions to the USER buttons Figure 328 By using the F1 F5 buttons you can assign up to five USER TABS PRES that is five different functions for the five User buttons below the display Press one of the F1 F5 buttons and the EDIT button to access the screen like Figure 329 Here you can assign to each USER button one of the following functions ILL 1 ILL 2 ILL 3 ILL 4 REAK 1 REAK 2 REAK 3 REAK 4 ILL TO ARR EINTRO AUTO FILL FTER FILL CLAP FX OFF WING BASS ASS TO ROOT ASS SUSTAIN OWER MUTE OWER OFF STOP OWER 1 HOLD OWER 2 HOLD IANIST SUSTAIN RASH Use the F10 button to save the USER TABS PRES in
125. ce effects Twin 2nd Voice RAM Ins 64 MB RAM for sounds loadable from disk Quick loading in multitask mode 2 x WAV 2 x MP3 2 x MIDI Real time stretching and audio transposition Play list Autoplay HD recording on 2 tracks MP3 encoder with modifiable resolution Audio Ripper from CD with wave transform and built in saving SMF player with KAR file karaoke and TXT file text KAR and MIDI file conversion type O to type 1 Jukebox Intelligent transposition Song chain Drum amp bass Lead on off Possibility to save new song set up within MIDI files AUDIO REMIX SEQUENCER REGISTRATIONS DRUM 2 Audio REAL AUDIO Up to 334 styles Real audio drums sequences Live accompaniment tracks including acoustic and ARRANGER electric guitars 4 arrangers for style A B C D 3 intro ending 4 fill ins 4 breaks Manual bass Jump Tap tempo Accelerando ritardando Auto Mute for single arranger parts After fill Slow fast tempo Bass pedal board functions Recognition of standard and rootless chords Assignable voice to Arranger Pianist standard and auto mode Bassist OCTAVE DOUBLE Octave selection 24 semitones Octave doubling HARMONY Full jazz bluegrass trill repeat folk 1 folk 2 2 hands echo tap PROFESSIONAL MULTIPLAYER MIDIFILE PLAYER lt O A m N TRANSPOSER Transposition of 24 semitones ARABIC SCALE 13 settings for the Arabic scale assignable with footswitch Tuning 99 cents of a
126. ces of the PIANO family will appear JU ees 2 By pressing one of the F1 F5 or F6 F10 buttons A pepe x iN select one of the ten voices shown on the display om pt O tree BJ E corresponding to the name of the voice SS n EE KR L For example by pressing the F4 button you will x 2 select the voice named HONKY_TONK Figure i h i ji Oo 3 Press the CURSOR a gt gt to select the various VOICE pages with further ten voices each Figure Figure 1 2 Note that you can access more than 2 pages for each voice family Tnm Taw s ZE BI Geer ame wr By turning the wheel clockwise oo 00 counter clockwise you can scroll the SCENE SE g pages just like the CURSOR a gt GS Oe LIS Also you can scroll the pages by pressing repeatedly the same VOICE family button e g PIANO EL PIANO and so on m m 9900009 Figure 2 14 KETRON e AUDYA Selecting voices Selecting a INS voice 1 Press the RAM INS SUPERSOLO button of the third row in the VOICE section The display will show a list of the SUPERSOLO voices stored on the hard disk Figure 3 2 Select one voice by using the CURSOR A V 1 0 CLE cns ntj 3 Press the ENTER button to load the INS voice into gt ren tenes pen gt the selected memory location The display will Q ve ISS e BC show the INS voice on the first free location 4 ee ec In the example the APACHE
127. d L e Bright Grand e Ac Grand R e Jingle e Concert Bright e Harpsichord e Harps Wide e Clavinet e Harps Octave e Electric e Pulse Clavi e Upright e Latin Piano Press the CURSOR a gt buttons together to switch a voice OFF By using the CURSOR A Y buttons you can scroll all the instruments from top to the the bottom of the list instead of scrolling them continously That is in the above example from Grand Piano up to Pulse Clavif 36 KETRON e AUDYA s H eg EES tel LJ D CONOCER T GA TRE MARG u LJ h Laa WHI a WS PO Ces w MK C E EON aaa LJ 5p dii atc a W O G Fg z J S z re 62 90000 ER 90000 Figure 64 SL E Wi ga uij go 00 go B Oa eO xx Run 65 0005656588 You can also assign one DRAWBARS voice to each PROGRAM only for the third VOICE Move the selection on the third VOICE by using the buttons F1 or F6 and press the DRAWBARS button to select one organ voice by using the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons or the wheel Figure 65 F2 F7 VOLUME By pressing the F2 or F7 buttons you will highlight repeatdly the voice of which you want adjust the volume Use the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR lt gt buttons to adjust the volume from 0 to 63 of three voices independently Figure 66 Press the CURSOR gt buttons together to automatically set the volume to zero F3 F8 SHIFT By pr
128. dow press the F3 button or F4 A list of MIDI files of the MIDIFILE folder will appear Figure 47 2 Select using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel a MIDI file from the list Our example is JENNIFER MID 3 Press the ENTER button to start MIDI file playback 4 Ifthe MIDI file contains lyrics you will see them on the right section of the MAIN VIEW window as illustrated in Figure 48 5 The USER buttons from 1 to 4 under the MAIN VIEW window will work like this USER 1 PAUSE CONTINUE USER 2 STOP USER 3 LEAD ON OFF melody mute USER 4 EXIT exit from the Lyric or MAIN VIEW window 6 While the MIDI file is playing back or paused by pressing the F3 button or F4 a second time the MAIN VIEW window is divided in two sections Figure 49 to the right the section LYRIC To the left the list of the MIDI files on the disc 7 In this way while the current file is playing back you can select the file from the list using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel and start using the ENTER button 8 Press the F3 button or F4 again to dispaly the ordinary window 9 Press the F10 button To switch the window LYRIC ON OFF B HOME button of the MIDI Player By pressing the MIDI button of the Player you can enter the usual list of MIDI files on the disc The window now shows the HOME function activated by the USER 3 button as illustrated in Figure 50 The HOME function is useful when you wa
129. drive OO EN E J EH utu from your local computer resources You will see Audya drive as any ordinary Removable Disk 4 After opening the Audya hard disk root folder you can handle the files like any ordinary storage device Figure C 5 You can copy from and to the internal folders of Removable Disk 1 Audya hard disk the following file types e MP3 MIDIFILE e STYLES PLAYLIST e DJ LOOPS e INSTRUMENTS e REGISTRATION e WAVE e SFX e ETC 6 After you finished copying the files please follow the USB hardware SAFE REMOVAL procedure and disconnect the USB cable from the rear panel of Audya and or from the computer USB port In Windows OS you can click on the icon located on the task bar A pop up window will open allowing you to disconnect the USB device safely 7 After a while Audya will operate again You do not need to restart Audya Figure A This disk or device contains more than one type of content What do you want Windows to do Take no action Figure B For advanced file handling and or file updating on the internal hard disk of Audya please see Disk on page 118 SE Ludi ken Jap 2 ZUUE La Sa t 9unetrumerts CQUSER LIVE GUITARS CALER STWLES Zap Oye 4 54 Cori zu LOL ZR La Lamp Zar E04 a e LC SOLOS 4 36 Ch peat SOS L4 065 Deech aah Lee 15 18 Lojreqetrsiarn 20 EO 2008 4 35 Cx au E Le LO Sa area Ed Pay DOE LA Segiem ll 2000 4 37
130. dya includes a new high quality sound engine 360 MB stereo and multilayer sound library including a new Stereo Grand Piano featuring an outstanding natural resonance There are an additional 64 MB RAM for custom sounds that can be quickly loaded in memory from disk while playing Audya also has a brand new DSP section with Rotor Distortion Phaser Flanger Tremolo Chorus Reverb effects and more B Audio Style Modeling For the first time ever an arranger keyboard features real audio grooves of drums percussions basses guitars arpeggios and licks all synchronized to MIDI clock A rich audio recordings library played by famous drummers and musicians have been added to the project and the live performances of the musicians have been recorded to match the styles and MIDI file playback with no distortion nor loss of quality Moreover also the live guitar grooves are synchronized perfectly to styles and MIDI files with no pitch shifting when the tempo is changed B Player The professional player can play up to five tracks simultaneously that is two WAVE files two MP3 files and one MIDI file with pre listen feature on headphones play list and crossfade functions B Karaoke A wide range of lyric options to display the text within MIDI files or synchronized to audio files are available MIDI and Audio Recording You can record and remix your songs within a complete audio MIDI hard disk recording environment Drawbars
131. e parameters to the default values After you set the parameters you can to store the custom Equalizer by pressing the USER 5 button SAVE or the SAVE button on the front panel A brief message SAVE DATA TO DISK will appear By pressing the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together you set the default frequency value of the EQ band or the Gain value of the EQ band to 0 88 KETRON e AUDYA Os ga Sa go Oa O99900000 Figure 247 Wi WA Bump ee enum tal B B e g WS C g Hz im rato PEHI me dai i Ce L oO mm RI Pera eme memrcxm irae L g Mina nir Lg irmr sep rit i mi m ni LI BU P E Td o 0o0g09g98 Figure 248 WAVE EQUALIZER By pressing the F8 button on the DSP page you can access the WAVE EQUALIZER screen as shown in Figure 249 Here you can select the WAVE EQUALIZER type to set as equalization of the WAVE Player 5 Wave Equalizer Presets are available Just press one of the F1 F5 buttons to select the corresponding Wave Equalizer type Wave Equal 1 Wave Equal 5 When you activate an Wave Equalizer Preset you can set the option Lock On Off as for the previous effects By pressing the EDIT button on the front panel you can access the parameters of the selected Wave Equalizer Preset as shown in Figure 249 The parameters are identical for all the five Wave Equalizer effects F1 Wave Equalizer choose from 1 to 5 F2 BASS FREQ bass frequency val
132. e 0 127 F7 LOOP ON OFF sets the loop on off F8 HOLD ON OFF sets the hold on off that Key Tunes Li Bi le 00 oo0gogOoUo 5 Figure Tig i RL Ua HI Sei a0 21 4 BG oa og oo0goOooO0 Figure 120 Oo aum 0 ge E 20 Do OEE Ni Co Samm eee Figure 121 means that the song continues playing after releasing the key otherwise the song stops e F9 DIN sets dynamic response of the keyboard that is the harder you play the louder the volume of the song e F10 SINGLE GLOBAL EDIT sets the changes for a single KEY TUNE or all By pressing USER 1 CLEAR ALL you will clear all the songs from the current KEY TUNE The Key Tunes feature uses a WAVE track so if a Key Tune is playing back the Wave Player will not work and viceversa KETRON e AUDYA 51 Double Harmony Double Harmony By pressing the DOUBLE button in the VOICE section you can activate the function to double ac the octave of the voice for the right hand ni By pressing the HARMONY button in the 00 VOICE section you can enable the function i to harmonize the voice for the right hand Two SH J pages with 10 options each are available Figure Hi 122 By using the F1 F10 buttons you can E a ee a access the following harmonizations WY z z z s z z O Figure 122 1 FULL1 F1 DOWN1 2 FULL2 2 UP1 3 JAZZ1 F3 DOWN2 4 JAZZ2 F4 UP2 5 2 HANDS F5 3RD DOWN T F6 FOLK1 F6 6TH UP n B o F7 FOLK
133. e first page and 10 in the second by pressing any CURSOR button or the DATA VALUE wheel Press any F1 F10 button to select the corresponding reverb type tudio1 and Studio2 Club1 and Club2 Hall1 and Hall2 heatre1 and Theatre2 tage and Stage2 Church1 and Church2 Hangar pace sert User2 User3 User4 and User5 see details later 82 KETRON e AUDYA 20 0 eaa Laus oe z d E oe ul QU een El BL CAR s 7 C Dn PP m S e Aa bb Figure 226 4g BALD fria Ca AND FAG D TK REVERE eeneg e ng Da TFA S Cj al Fw ao HE E 0 We O00O0O0OQgoO Figure 227 IEEE m Theater 28 1 Lu ipa j MYA Cea e Ng x D SE KH PEE LE m Ss 5 099959998989 Figure 228 OB Gg Dess BEI eil ae e mi Ng C 5 n LES H Hr um xy ii m GER OCH CO OH C 7 l ane 229 s After you select the effect for the right hand you can hear the result by playing directly on the right split of the keyboard To lock the reverb also when changing Program or Registration or at start up press the Lock ON button corresponding to the USER 1 button Figure 229 After the effect type selection exit by pressing the EXIT button or directly by pressing the MENU button To store the reverb type at start up press the SAVE button on the front panel and F6 CUSTOM STARTUP LEFT GM REVERB From the REVERB page by pressing the F2 button
134. e of the F1 F10 buttons For example F1 E e oi comucast e 5 Press the WAVE button or MP3 SFX MIDI to EIE D mc select a song or a MIDI file and press ENTER sen ji JE ed Se e The selected song MIDI file will be assigned to the Like i Lern 8 ue pimp ET IR ec bh b im Fon reg ant eck rm Pur gam P ege D fren i P IKE GK i aa HUE e tee F1 button Gu m Se we 6 Press the F2 button and select another song MIDI LG se eng see C file and press ENTER The song will be assigned Cj n EUR Ino to the F2 button n r 7 Dothe same for any other F1 F10 button Figure CH oo oc e 5 118 C m wm S E O S ee ai 8 When finished press the USER 5 button SAVE Figure 118 9 Give a name to the PLAY LIST and press SAVE again By pressing the A PLAY ON OFF button USER 5 you can enable disable the automatic playback of the songs currently in the Play List 50 KETRON e AUDYA Key Tunes By pressing the KEY TUNES button in the VOICE section you can assign a song to each key of the keyboard You can freely assign any song of the WAVE folder to any key of the keyboard m 1 11 12 Creating a KEY TUNE Press the KEY TUNES button A screen showing KEY TUNE DEMO will appear Figure 119 that is a demonstration file to understand KEY TUNES features Press the USER 3 button CREATE in order to create a new KEY TUNE Select a song from the WAVE folder by using
135. ecord an Audio Drum please use the audio recording method ju Sa Sa go Oa o9T0G005 ot i s HENGT Peres we Tea ze 7H e op eer Lama ps Tre D D a He e Tree Hag get n hi LF rei Bii ind aO gt AN n Figure 283 Figure 284 KETRON 0 AUDYA 101 MIDI Remix MIDI Remix Audya offers a MIDI REMIX function to replace the drum track in any MIDI file with the drum part of an internal Style of Audya even one with AUDIO DRUM part m Making a MIDI Remix 1 Press the MIDI button in the Player section and select a MIDI file from the list In the example the file is Raindrops Keep Falli mid 123 BPM 2 Press the F9 button to enable the REMIX ON function Figure 285 3 Select a style with approximately the same tempo BPM of the MIDI file If the tempo differs too much a warning message will appear inviting you to select another style In the example Figure 286 the D FLOOR style has been selected By using the STYLE VIEW button and the F1 button you can also change the drum kit and choose any AUDIO DRUM groove In the example Figure 287 the DANCE 80 2 125 audio groove 125 BPM has been selected 4 Press the USER 5 button START to start the REMIX 5 After a while the START button flashes and you can start playback the MIDI file with the new audio drum track replacing the original drum track of the MIDI file That means that the MIDI file Raindrops Ke
136. ed also changing the style By pressing button USER 5 you can select the SINGLE or GLOBAL mode in order to change the single Varia tion of the style or all the Variations 54 KETRON e AUDYA me LL 177 77 7T 4 mn Hang het ceni mates sein CA cmm Tub Gesi ops uel e g ren Tyr Pi Epel ER waza a g sur rw Kai rer sept a i D L ps C Gh JU eem i casar JEE 06gogOogO Figure 129 di 4 Ca He sla aina e zi i p C ies Figure 131 JW BC 00 0j ac ICI JU 00 8 ICI n gel KR Je ao Tay Style View Audio Style Modeling The Audio Style Modeling is the powerful system of Audya sound engine The place where you can model the style is the Style View section e By entering the Style View section you can see all the sections of the style on the display Normally if you select a section you can change the Program Change by using the DATA VALUE wheel or choosing directly the sound You can control the volume with the CURSOR buttons e On some sections by pressing twice the button you can access directly to a specific Library of that section The tables of the Library can work in place of the MIDI parts usually programmed for the Style e By pressing twice the F1 F2 F3 F9 and F10 buttons you can select from the Audio Style Modeling Libraries or from the ordinary MIDI parts For example F1 Audio Drum audio only F2 Groove
137. ed to SUSTAIN PEDAL on the rear panel The PedToRotor ON OFF parameter is not stored into the user DRAWBARS so it must be activated manually KETRON e AUDYA 73 RAM Ins Supersolo RAM Ins Supersolo By pressing the RAM INS SUPERSOLO button in the VOICE section you can access the I SE Wa 05 mind ors Cie dd I ie ea the SUPERSOLO voices Se car cum a BEI OO iiim OO Creating and editing an INS block Cg jx Spe Le By pressing the EDIT button you can access the edit screen of the RAM INS SUPERSOLO voices Figure 198 By using the F1 F10 buttons A r3 oO z m 5 you can execute the following functions m ue m Bo wm e e F1 CLEAR amp LOAD clears the current Figure 198 memory and loads the selected INS voice s e F2 CLEAR SELECT clears the memory only for the currently selected INS voice s n F6 CLEAR ALL clears the memory of all dini the INS voices Ri e F7 SAVE SELECT stores the currently ln selected voices in one file Give a name by Bi using the keyboard and press the USER 5 E Inno button SAVE to store the INS block EM d In the example the file is MY SUPERSOLO GH E OH CH CH OH CH CH e F8 AUTO LOAD OFF enables disables the EM Fi Lu C C CS C S i igure 199 automatic loading into memory of an INS block To choose the autoload function of an RBK file just move to the RBK file and switch the Auto Load parameter from OFF t
138. ent 1 for the bass see note F2 Bass Drum Instr 2 percussive instrument 2 for the bass see note F3 Chords Drum Instr 1 percussive instrument 1 for the chords see note F4 Chords Drum Instr 1 percussive instrument 1 for the chords see note F6 Bass Drum Velo 1 Velocity setting for the percussive instrument 1 of the bass values 0 127 F7 Bass Drum Velo 2 Velocity setting for the percussive instrument 3 of the bass values 0 127 F8 Chords Drum Velo 1 Velocity setting for the percussive instrument 1 of the chords values 0 127 F9 Chords Drum Velo 1 Velocity setting for the percussive instrument 2 of the chords values 0 127 VEL CURVE By pressing the F6 button from the KEYBOARD CONTROL page you can set the Velocity Curve Figure 259 that is the dynamic curve of the keyboard You can set the values by pressing repeatedly the F6 button The available values are Soft1 Soft2 Normal Hard1 and Hard2 You can select also a fixed Velocity Curve value VEL CURVE FIXED In this case set the fixed value by using the CURSOR a gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel values 1 63 VEL FILTER By pressing the F7 button from the KEYBOARD CONTROL page you can set the Velocity Filter Figure 260 that is the dynamic curve of the filter You can set the values by pressing repeatedly the F7 button The available values are Openi Open2 Close and Closed ARABIC By pressing the F8 button from the KEYBOARD
139. ep Falli mid will play with drum track of the DANCE 80 2 125 audio groove 6 During the playback of the REMIX you can also change the A B C D variations and the Fills of the selected style as well as you can change the style itself Figure 288 7 Press the SAVE button to save the REMIX file while the MIDI file and the REMIX are still playing 8 Give a name to the file directly from the keyboard and press SAVE again 9 Access the REMIX file RMX from the list by using the wheel or the CURSOR 10 Wait a while to load the RMX file and press the USER 5 button START When the START button flashes you can start playback the REMIX In the same way you can add to the REMIX also the track of Live guitar To do this you must enter the menu keyboard CONTROL gt UTILITY and set the REMIX LIVE GUITAR parameter to ON Figure 289 In this way when you start a MIDI REMIX besides the audio drum you can adjust also the Live Guitar track by playing on the keyboard just as with any style When you select the styles for REMIX you must disable the MY FOLDERS function otherwise they will be selected by pressing the buttons 0 9 102 KETRON e AUDYA 5o 5o 9 EN 7H ga Oa Qu S a O z z z z Figure 285 L IR Qu Oa 6oc0ocO0ogoO SZT 286 Ou Qu SA 2 B Qa 6 s z C z z Figure 288 oa E Far ery D SE om
140. erged a single audio file will be created by using the lower number of the two files and two bak files backup files of the two original wav files HI uJj 00 eo Sao Ei 0999599969 Figure 277 R B 00 eo nog Ch 0000009 Figure 278 0999590990 BG j GEN LJ L ii un Sei g H deme Fe bn Fei KE H SS w Dn Poos Li vel dg ed e m TS d TET mat e i LJ D wll te d lai rel x H T er Eit Leah K OU uu x umm D Ch O9990000 Figure 280 KETRON 0 AUDYA 99 Avoiding the MIDI file recording mixed to the source When you make a MIDI SYNC RECORDING by selecting a Main or Keyboard source also the MIDI file playing will be recorded into the audio file To avoid this you can follow two procedures Manual procedure 1 Select MENU gt Out Assign gt Out1 amp 2 and set MIDI1 to 1 amp 2 stereo 2 While recording the keyboard will be output to MAIN OUT and will be recorded The MIDI will be present on 1 and 2 outputs without being recorded Automatic procedure 3 Select MENU gt Keyboard Control gt Utility and set the Headph to out3 amp 4 item to ON 4 Now making the recording the MIDI will be output automatically to the headphones and will not be recorded on the audio track 5 Remember that when the Headph to out3 amp 4 item is set to ON also WAV MP3 will be present on the headphones that is all the sources set to out
141. es PAGE1 J PAGE2 F3 VIBRATO Editing a vocal effect 1 Select one MICRO PRESETS from the list on the display 2 Press the EDIT button on the front panel A window like Figure 293 will appear 4 Byusing the F1 F10 buttons you can select the following options F1 MICRO 1 F2 MICRO2 F3 REVERB FA ECHO F5 TRANSFORM F6 COMPRESSOR F LIMITER F8 EQUALIZER F9 VIBRATO F10 PITCH Ge 104 ketron e AUDYA i Hat ATRA O T L o ap CATED ma g Dh bai en Low L Dm E P U Ei EN EI Ei CH vi Figure 292 EE sc ehrn e i ta A Qu uo BU 5 g mn Ka cias m Cj 5000009985 Figure 293 Please note that for MICRO1 that is the microphone connected to MICRO 1 on the rear all the options are available while for MICRO2 only REVERB and ECHO are available MICRO1 By selecting the F1 button MICRO1 you can choose one of the following options F3 REVERB FA ECHO F5 TRANSFORM F6 COMPRESSOR F LIMITER F8 EQUALIZER F9 VIBRATO F10 PITCH MICRO2 By selecting the F2 button MICRO2 you can choose one of the following options F3 REVERB FA ECHO REVERB By selecting the F3 button a REVERB screen like Figure 294 will appear where you can choose one of the available reverbs by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel ECHO By selecting the F4 button a ECHO screen like Figure 295 will appear where you can choose one of the available Echo effec
142. es respectively MANUAL sets the manual bass for the left hand TO LOWEST sets the lowest note of the chord to the root For example when you want to play a bass pedal within a chord progression BASSIST allows to play free bass notes on a chord played by using the right hand For example when you play bass solos B SPLIT Holding the SPLIT button a small keyboard at the bottom of the display appears By pressing any key on the keyboard you can set the split point for the Arranger In the example the SPLIT point has been set on F2 note Figure 16 The SPLIT point is always set on C3 note at startup B PIANIST The PIANIST button allow you to play on the entire keyboard Basically by pressing this button you remove the SPLIT point If Arranger mode the chords will be recognized on the entire keyboard B LEFT VOICE By pressing the LEFT VOICE button this will flash until you choose the voice for the left hand Figure 17 Once selected press LEFT VOICE button again For the detailed explanation of the PLAY CONTROL section please see the following pages corresponding to the namesake buttons e DRUM MIXER page 68 e GM PART page 65 e STYLE MODE page 59 e STYLE VIEW page 53 e USER ASSIGNABLE page 113 e SEARCH page 119 Play Control J0 JuU ga Oa D gt z O U uU z J Figure 16 DRUM MIXER M PART MODE VIEW USER ASSIGNABLE EZM KETRON e AUDYA 19 Mixer Mixer The Mixer
143. es of the MP3 folder Figure 55 or SFX files of the SFX folder will appear Figure 56 Select an MP3 file or SFX from the list by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel Press the ENTER button to start playback of the MP3 file or SFX file Press the USER 3 HOME button to activate the MAIN VIEW window as shown by the arrow of Figure 55 and Figure 56 The MAIN VIEW window will appear and on the right side the list of MP3 files Figure 57 or SFX files Figure 58 on the disc If an MP3 SFX file contains lyric the LYRIC window will appear in place of the list as illustrated in Figure 58 The USER from 1 to 4 buttons in the MAIN VIEW window will have the following functions USER 1 PAUSE CONTINUE USER 2 STOP USER 3 LEAD ON OFF melody mute USER 4 EXIT exit from the Lyric or MAIN VIEW window By pressing the F3 button or F4 a second time while an MPS3 SFX file with lyric is playing back or paused the MAIN VIEW window is divided into two sections Figure 59 the section LYRIC on the right side the list of the MP3 SFX files on the disc on the left side In this way while the current file is playing back you can select a file from the list by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel and start with button ENTER To return to the ordinary window press the F3 button or F4 again 34 KETRON e AUDYA Hi SS pes CI Oe E Ge mal AC oa was SC BC Q
144. eset calls a compressor preset i e overwrites NRPN 100 01 tO 100 05 with predefined values See table below for description of the presets Lead EQ 101 Input gain 24dB OdB 12dB 1 dB step 76 101 T l Band gain 14dB OdB 14dB 1 dB step 78 Harmony EQ Input gain 24d B OdB 12dB 1 dB step 102 nem Band gain 44dB OdB 14dB 1 dB step Heverb EchO Reverb Echo 103 BS 0 127 VE Lead voice reverb send level same as CC 5Bh on lead channel 103 0 127 Harmony reverb send level same as CC 5Bh on harmony channel 103 02 Q 127 127 Reverb level Echo level Reverb time 0 40ms Echo time 0 40ms to 127 400ms Reverb echo high pass filter on input 0 no filter Reverb damp high frequency filter on reverb decay Echo damp high frequency filter echo feedback Echo feedback Reverb preset calls a reverb preset See table below for description of the presets Echo preset calls on echo preset See table below for description of the presets 103 2 0 127 Reverb input level 10 13 0 127 O Echo input level 103 0 127 O Send echo to reverb Note EQ band frequencies are fixed to the following values 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 0 127 0 127 0 127 0 127 0 127 0 127 0 127 0 18 127 O Co 10 O Co O O oo N OS il KETRON 0 AUDYA 157 9 o Bo p B M 205 6b 7 je B Reset NRPN NRPN NRPN Data Def
145. ess the ENTER button Figure 112 to recall the REGISTRATION BLOCK Once the REGISTRATION BLOCK is loaded the REGISTRATION SINGLE is recalled corresponding to the F1 F10 buttons By using the USER 1 button you can activate the SINGLE PLAY or MULTI PLAY function in order to play the Registration automatically It can be useful to store several SINGLE REGISTRATIONS with some WAVE songs s z s z z Fiore 43 HI B Te p o Soo le a In Go gu On 5600000 OU s JU Figure 112 Wu B Te Si J WR le Soo prepared into the Player Storing the SINGLE wend REGISTRATIONS by using the Player and Figure 113 AUTOPLAY sections enabled you can quickly recall the REGISTRATION BLOCK containing those SINGLE REGISTRATIONS by using the F1 F10 buttons REGISTRATION BLOCK 8 By using the F1 F10 buttons you can recall the corresponding item Style Voice or Player Creating a fast REGISTRATION BLOCK 1 In addition to SINGLE REGISTRATION you can save Styles Voices and Player directly Open the REGISTRATION screen and press USER 4 BLOCK 2 Press the EDIT button and the USER 1 button CREATE 3 Press any F1 F10 buttons 4 Select a Style a voice or a song from the Player and press ENTER 5 Do the same for any other F1 F10 button Figure 113 NOTE 6 Press the SAVE button and give a name to the When you enter the Registration Block EDIT mode the REGISTRATION BLOCK Ge 7 Press
146. ess the F1 button KEYBOARD to set the recording mode from keyboard Press the USER 5 button START REC or the ENTER button to start the MIDI recording Play the keyboard and or start the Arranger Press the USER 4 button STOP REC to stop recording A file in the MIDIFILE folder of the disk will be created Figure 283 Press the START button or the USER 5 button START to start playback of the recorded MIDI file To browse and listen the recorded MIDI file press the MIDI button in the Player section B Recording a MIDI file from the MIDI IN port 1 Press the MENU button and the F9 button MIDI RECORDING to enter the MIDI recording environment 2 You will be prompted to give a name to the file Digit the name for the MIDI file directly from the keyboard 3 Press the F2 button MIDI PORT IN GM to set the data recording mode from the external port Figure 284 4 Press the USER 5 button START REC to start the MIDI recording 5 Start the external MIDI sequencer or play any MIDI keyboard connected to the MIDI IN connector 6 Press the USER 4 button STOP REC to stop MIDI recording 7 A file in the MIDIFILE folder of the disk will be created 8 To browse and listen the recorded MIDI file press the MIDI button in the Player section If you make a MIDI recording using an Audio Drum part for the drum the drum sounds AUDIO will not be recorded into the MIDI recording If you want to r
147. essing the F3 or F8 buttons you will highlight repeatdly the voice of which you want adjust the pitch Use the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR gt buttons to adjust the pitch of three voices by 24 semitones independently Figure 67 Press the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together to set automatically the pitch to zero F4 F9 TUNE By pressing the F4 or F9 buttons you will highlight repeatdly the voice of which you want adjust the fine pitch Use the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR 4 buttons to adjust the fine pitch of three voices independently The value from 63 to 64 corresponds to 100 cents that is 1 semitone Figure 68 Press the CURSOR a gt buttons together to automatically set the fine pitch to zero F5 F10 PAN By pressing the F5 or F10 buttons you will highlight repeatdly the voice of which you want adjust the panoramic position PAN Use the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons to adjust the PAN of three voices independently The value from 63H to 64L corresponds to the right and to the left position respectively Figure 69 Press the CURSOR 4 gt buttons together to automatically set the PAN in the center position ju ga go GAN Program Ut ag EI om go gao gmo On te a OD Ki GL GAN o A e uU oa Go Go Oa 9 a oo 299398 OOoQgoo Figure 66 Eun 67 OOoQgoo Figure 68
148. essthe F5 button Style Enabled to enable the function for the single Style 6 Press the F10 button Global Enabled to enable the VOICE TO ARRANGE function globally for all the Styles 7 Save your choices into the current style by pressing the SAVE button on the front panel Style Mode menie i pn jam m m PST REET r m Fiat un hana a joo Se UO rur Hi em Le i m d d dan ET A z z s z Figure 147 or ORE USE na RE Sep ol d z miaa m res om RE rapper wes at e aeeg Tal Le FLU GET ni Les seg E i H LJ DE monum Em Em 1 ar irr Em oci E En md eo Te s z s z z Figure 148 Ge On Qu 9 a 6 6 Figure 149 Tens ag E 00 a0 E BO s z s z z SNE KETRON 0 AUDYA 61 Style Mode m DRUM 1 By pressing the USER 2 DRUM once you can access to the first edit window of the audio drum Figure 151 F1 LIVE DRUM sets the STRETCH or PITCH mode for Audio Style Modeling of the live drum The STRETCH algorithm default guarantees a good audio quality even changing the tempo The available range is 3096 up to 38 of the nominal speed of the wave The PITCH algorithm matches the tempo change of the sample altering the audio content The available range is 30 up to 38 F3 BASS FREQ EQ adjusts the EQ low frequency of the audio drum from 50 Hz to 990 Hz FA TREBLE FREQ EQ adjusts the EQ high freq
149. ev1 user reverb 1 ser Rev2 user reverb 2 ser Rev3 user reverb 3 ser Rev4 user reverb 4 ser Rev5 user reverb 5 F3 F8 EFF ASSIGN you can assign an effect to each VOICE Figure 79 as shown below NONE no effect CHORUS Chorus effect CHO Echo effect CHO CHO Echo Chorus effect DIST Distortion effect DIST CHO Distortion Echo effect DIST ECHO CHO Distortion Echo Chorus effect e F4 F9 EFF TYPE for each assigned effect you can set the effect type Figure 80 E g for the CHORUS effect type you can choose Chorus1 Chorus2 Chorus3 Chorus6 remolo1 Tremolo2 Tremolo3 haser1 Phaser2 Phaser3 langer1 Flanger2 Flanger3 User Cho1 User Cho2 User Cho5 40 KETRON e AUDYA 0999095999 Figure 77 ui RH 00 0j Sao KERERE Figure 78 Ic Ch o000000 Figure 79 Gu Omp go Si Oa Figure 80 By pressing the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together you set the default effect WARNING If you select the DIST Distortion effect for one VOICE you cannot select an effect like CHORUS or ECHO for the remaining VOICES You can select an effect like DIST for the three VOICES or any combination of DIST CHO or DIST ECHO CHO effects For the ECHO effect Figure 81 you can choose from the following types Mono Echo1 Mono Echo2 Mono Echo5 tereo Echo1 Stereo Echo2 Stereo Echo5 riple Echo1 Triple Echo2 Triple Echo5 Mono User1 tereo User1 Stere
150. evel harmony parts global level same as Control 7 on channel HC Acts on all the harmony voices as a global volume control without overwriting the independent harmony part levels NRPN 99 06 to 99 10 Harmony voice N volume is Harmony Global level Harmony voice N volume overwrite this setting overwrite this setting overwrite this setting overwrite this setting overwrite this setting 07 i hi 0 64 27 nm 0 64 127 ss o Wale Vocedfomam ss In ale Voedfomam 16 0 38 38 Voice 1 tone frequency harmony voice low pass filter cutoff frequency Voice 2 tone frequency KETRON 0 AUDYA 155 ss pe um a Voices tone frequency se he um 38 Voice4 tone frequency nm a f voce tone requeney 64 71 Voice 1 tone resonance harmony voice low pass filter resonance amount joo e an Ja Voieztmeresoname so a an a Voiedtmereonace SSCS So a an In Vice4tonereoname so e aan In VoieStoereonace e oe 0 64 127 G4 Voice 1 detune 50 0 50 cents se e Walen Viezdeme so o 0 64 7 a Voce3deue me o ams opene ss am 0 64 7 ViceSdeme SSS ss a a o Voicelvibratodepirupto 1 semitone ss e be o Vocezvivtodeph SSS ss a o o Vocedvbmtodeph ss a ue o Voce4vimtodeph ss a e o VjceSvivatodeph ss ae be Jm Voice 1 vibrato rate up to approximately 12Hz e e o Jm ka e a ue Jm Voie3veratore e Im oar e Vocedvimtore ss a ue Im Wee r me
151. f the keyboard is connected to the USB port of a computer it will be recognized as USB SPEAKERS driver for the MIDI data transmission from and to the computer When the keyboard is connected via USB to a computer the green LED of the USB EXIT button will light e he keyboard can be used as external control unit and as sound module for MIDI applications such as Cubase Sonar Reaper and so on for example e Once the MIDI application is open you can select the MIDI In port and the MIDI Out port recognized as USB SPEAKERS e n Figure 225 the arrow indicates the MIDI IN and MIDI OUT ports in a Cubase track e Once the MIDI communication via USB is open you will be able to record MIDI tracks e he material that you record via MIDI into a track of the sequencer can be output directly by using the Audya sound module ju Sa go Sa Oa o goO0ogco 5 Figure 224 Figure 225 NOTE Please disable the soft MIDI THRU function from the sequencer application in order to avoid dangerous MIDI loops x oe WS 609 Moes re Ges eee iai E varii Piaget pomi Bir i oia Deam Poly Eugene kae E rr For the correct playback of the parts and the instruments please use the same MIDI channels for the transmission and the reception For example Right MIDI channel 1 both TX and RX Left MIDI channel 2 both TX and RX Bass MIDI channel 3 both TX and RX Chord1 MIDI channel 5 bot
152. from the keyboard In the example Figure 347 the input name to search is BATT 5 Press the USER 5 button GLOB SEARCH to start searching 6 After a while a screen by using the search results will appear In the example Figure 348 all the files containing the text BATT have been found 7 The files are immediately available to start playback directly from the search screen USB drive Search SL eg JU unti ao o mmi GZSZ z iS Figure 345 H Bi Te DC o nc o 6000009 SS Qa E zr 50 pime wai oo00ogO0ogooO O 000060 O Figure 348 KETRON e AUDYA 119 Technical Tables GM Voices BANK A CCO Value 0 N VOICE Musette 6 2 AIO OIININININININININININ C1 NO OJN J c n j oj doj jo Oj O O0 O O1 C2 O BANK B CCO Value 1 N VOICE Jingle Electric Latin Piano Piano oncert_Grand right_Grand win Fm Hard Dx Musicbox Tubular Bell Marimba Long Vibe Kalimba Ep Phase 1 rch Bell 16 jWindchimes Dry Organ O N 0 ER 6 LE 8 9 15 16 O1 120 KETRON e AUDYA N VOICE coustic inger icked etless unk ynbass1 ynbass2 iolin O D ett Ke lt ioloncello ontrabass remolos izzicato mpani rings low Strings ynstrings1 ynstrings2 es 2 32 Kei CD ynvoice Mexican rombone
153. g Machine Gun unch1 ain creaming irene arship iver hunder ain O sch wech sesch sesch O ojojolo m mi OJ O2 OIOIOIOIO o o O D D D amp U m o o 312 9 la la lo Q o Im O m3 515 D Q co 7 ech CO esch sech sech lI NIOJ P esch LO MNINININ JINI Oo o i NO I esch NO CO nch2 N DRUMSET Contemporary Urban Electro Country op Super Kit unk Super Kit ower Super Kit Audio Drum 67 16 BEATIRX76 38 16 BEAT2RX_93 6 BEAT2_93 6 BEAT3RX_93 1 1 1 16 BEAT3 93 1 1 1 LA 9 6 BEAT4 82 N 268 16 BEAT5RX_ 70 206 16 BEAT8 80 11 7 8 179 269 201 270 202 271 140 BEAT2RX_73 199 200 213 290 2 1 231 E 8 8 3 BBEAT273 4 8BEATS 82 136 8 BEAT4RX_115 5 8 BEAT4 115 137 BBEATSRX 73 APACHE 124 174 175 197 198 APACHE 124 BAJON 88 UJ gt O gt gt o UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ c LU Er rro ITI HAAA gt S S Sj S ZIZIZIZIZ oim mm m zm OT a al x 2 OlRIREI P UJ UJ UJ rrr C C C TI IT TI HEE PP IDA xI Mile jd Beh Tals Co UJ C m E VW Qo JJ Ee Co Oo 8 9 268 179 269 201 270 202 271 206 _ n 140 199 200 _ 213 290 _ C RE 231 3 4 136 5 137 6 197 198 12 13 i4 221 15
154. ga Slap 15 RollO1 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare002 5 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom Flam01 23 Tom FlamO2 71 WhistleO1 72 Whistle02 25 Snare007 73 GuiroO1 26 Fingsnap 01 28 Close 76 W_Block_Hi 77 W Block Lo 31 SticksO1 32 Click 80 TriangleO1 33 Metronome 01 81 Triangled2 82 Shaker01 35 Kick41 83 Shaker02 36 Kick37 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshot18 38 Snare063 86 TambourineO2 39 ClapO1 87 Rimshot01 40 Snare014 88 Snare013 89 Snare011 90 Snare009 43 TimpaniO3 91 MiddleO1 92 Stick03 45 TimpaniO05 93 Close02 46 TimpaniO6 48 TimpaniO8 96 Applause 49 TimpaniO9 97 Belltree 50 Timpani10 55 Crash04 103 Empt 56 Cowbell01 57 Crash05 58 Vibraslap 59 Crash07 60 Bongo Hi Studio Program Change 57 62 Conga Slap 15 RollO1 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom FlamO1 70 Maracas01 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleO1 72 Whistle02 73 Guiro01 74 Guiro02 75 Claves01 28 Snare008 o 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica01 31 SticksO1 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleO1 33 Metronome O1 81 IriangleO2 82 Shaker01 35 Kick03 83 Shaker02 36 Kick04 84 SticksO2 37 RimshotO1 85 Castagnet 38 Snare083 86 TambourineO02 39 Clap01 87 Rimshot04 40 Snare082 88 Snare009 89 Snare010 42 Stick03 90 Snare012 91 Middle
155. gn numbers only to files of the actual Player F1 or to all file types F2 In the lower part of the window a progress bar will appear during the file number ing of the folder Instead if a numbering is already assigned a pop up to remove numbering will ap pear 24 KETRON e AUDYA ross Frida Weck seek pnm w Cen eee le ewe 3 Im a limit See arel vo son ep EE EE EE Der di pop E neen Cora eg Geh m jenem m ae ent E e SES Figure 27 QOUCOO Figure 28 999909 Figure 29 Figure 30 lim BC ag ec BI DCH 00 eo ac ha Voicetron Voicetron The Voicetron section has one volume fader for MICRO and one volume fader for VOCALIZER both with on off LED button Once you connect a microphone to the MICRO 1 connector and or MICRO 2 connector you can access to a wide range of options for the voice processing VOICETRON MICRO VOCALIZER B MICRO The MICRO button enables both MICRO 1 and MICRO 2 inputs Connect one or two dynamic microphones to the connectors on the rear panel and adjust the gain level by using the GAIN 1 and GAIN 2 small knobs on rear panel B VOCALIZER E The VOCALIZER button enables the multi ja L Luc processor effects for harmonization and L IB wem seme MI automatic pitch control only on MICRO 1 input 5o E ei Je B Setting a vocal effect 5p WESSEN ag 1 Press the MICRO button Cim geg Ges n
156. gned to the Key Tune but also when you will play a C chord in all the variations In this way the Hold parameter will be set to ON To stop the Key Tune song just press a C chord or C note again This function is useful for the accordion player playing MIDI files When the Key Tune To Chord function is active the melody part of the accordion will not start the Key Tune but only the Chord part will In this way you can assign 12 songs maximum for example a song assigned to the G5 key and another to the G6 key by using the chord recognition G will start the song assigned to G5 key Combining this function to Registrations the accordion player can launch the MIDI files and the other settings in the Registration directly from the accordion without touching the keyboard B OUTPUT ASSIGN e By pressing the F5 button from the main page of the MENU you can access to the OUTPUT ASSIGN screen where you can make the routing settings of the internal sources to the outputs on the rear Main Stereo and separate outputs as shown in Figure 268 The options are the following F1 Out3 amp 4 3 and 4 outputs F2 Out1 amp 2 Drum 1 and 2 outputs for the drum and the percussive instruments F3 Out1 amp 2 1 and 2 outputs for the right hand all the drums and MIDI Out3 amp 4 By using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel you can select the source to send to the 3 and 4 outputs The internal sources interne are the following
157. h TX and RX Drum1 MIDI channel 10 both TX and RX and so on KETRON 0 AUDYA 81 m DSP e From the first screen of the menu press the F3 button to open the DSP Digital Signal Processor settings page as shown in Figure 226 By using the F1 F10 buttons you can edit the following pages F1 REVERB Reverb settings F2 CHORUS Chorus settings F3 ECHO DELAY Echo settings F4 DISTORTION Distortion settings F5 ROTOR Rotor Leslie settings F6 DRAWBAR OVERDRIVE Organ distortion settings F EQUALIZER Equalizer settings F8 WAVE EQUALIZER Wave file EQ settings REVERB By pressing the F1 button on the DSP page you can access the REVERB window as shown in Figure 227 Here you can select the following parameters F1 RIGHT REVERB selection of the reverb for the right hand opens another window F2 LEFT GM REVERB selection of the reverb for the left hand and the GM parts opens another window F6 Right Level reverb amount settings for the right hand values 0 63 F7 Left GM Level reverb amount settings for the left hand and the GM parts values 0 63 F8 Micro Level reverb amount settings for the microphone values 0 63 By pressing the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together you set the value to 0 RIGHT REVERB From the REVERB page by pressing the F1 button Right Reverb you can access the page for the selection of the reverb for the right hand Figure 228 10 reverb Presets are available in th
158. h track by moving the corresponding fader acting like a Dj player gu WEEN Di s a 24 me 08 Sse Oo rae Viez ej 80 JU am m BC 0999095909 Figure 24 ui B5 CT m bs Figure 25 ui BH m der Sao 6goOogoo Lwa Figure 26 KETRON e AUDYA 23 Player New player features MP3 player now has a mixer Once selected you can access to the mixer MENU By pressing the F10 button 3 NEXT you can access the corresponding window of the MIXER Figure 29 where you can set the following parameters using the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons F2 Bass values 12 dB F3 Treble values 12 dB F4 Loud values from 0 to 16 dB Enabled Numb Files Function By setting the Enabled Numb Files parameter to ON on the MENU gt Keyboard Control gt Utility gt Next Page as illustrated in Figure 27 all the files in the Player are numbered When they are numbered Fig ure 28 they can be recalled in to numerical way as for Registrations using the numeric keypad When this Function is active by pressing twice the F10 but ton 8 NEXT you can access to window similar to Fig ure 30 where adjust the following parameters F6 Alphab Numeric Sort file sorting in alphabetical or numerical way F7 Number Ass it allows to assign permanently the numbers into files so that in future if you modify the folder indexing of files remains the same This option opens to pop up where you can assi
159. he dialogue box by inputting characters directly from the keyboard and press SAVE again Figure 336 2 Select an MSP from disc to load it into memory By pressing the ENTER button a progress bar will appear When the file is loaded you can select it by pressing the INS EFFECT SFX It will be treated as an INS voice Program or MIDI insertion etc The MSP files created by Audya will be stores in a single file containing all the information data to work unlike the previous versions of KETRON files which need to have the WAV files in the same folder Ot means that if you want to use a previous version of MSP file you should put all the linked WAV files in the same folder of the MSP file 116 KETRON e AUDYA ja 7 B 5o Sa Ua OGESSGSESE Bi Te 00 Ino Text Scrolling Text scrolling In addition to the ordinary lyric functions J cerca E Ce E showing synchronized text contained in the Standard MIDI files karaoke Audya allows to Chill Out wav synchronize lyric with any audio and MP3 file B Combining a text file with a MIDI file an MP3 or a WAVE file 1 Make the USB connection to access the hard disk of Audya After connecting open the WAVE folder and copy a text file an ordinary TXT file containing the lyric of a song The name of the TXT file must be identical to the title of the song except the file extension Figure 337 In the example the text file is
160. he MIDI FILE MIDI SYNC RECORDING page 99 TEXT ALL NO F5 Enabled Number Files enables disables the the file numbering values ON OFF F6 Main View enables disables the MAIN VIEW mode values ON OFF F7 Autoswitch Time sec sets the automatic time to switch to the MAIN VIEW from other screens values OFF 0 60 F8 Lyric Txt Small Font sets the small font display of the lyrics values ON OFF F9 Registration Sort sets the sort mode of the Registration list values Numeric Alphab F10 Registration Restore enables disables the RESTORE function which restores the panel to the conditions before the Registration recall values ON OFF By pressing the USER 5 button again you can access a further settings page press USER 4 to return to the previous page as shown on Figure 265 Here you can find the following functions F1 MPS LINE IN TRANSP enables disables ON OFF the transposition of the MP3 file and of the Line In input signal This function if set to OFF allows to play the MP3 file together with the style without affecting the pitch of the MP3 by changing the tempo of the style F2 WAV DJ MIX enables disables ON OFF the DJ MIX function between the WAVE and DJ LOOP Players see procedure below 94 KETRON e AUDYA SI E AR AR 50 Om i tagog A O00gOOUUOOUJg Figure 264 0j a Ce RL 9e EE tree Oo mum ead wazo ures ac Figure 265 F3 Player amp STYLE MIX values ON OF
161. he VOICE EDIT page are visible but you cannot modify the organ voice parameters 2ND VOICE Press the USER 2 button 2nd Voice to see a screen like Figure 73 by using the parameters for the second voice 2ND VOICE that you can activate by pressing the 2ND VOICE button in the VOICES section Press the F1 F10 buttons to access the parameters of the 2ND VOICE Modify the values of the selected parameter by using the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR a gt buttons F1 2ND VOICE you can assign an instrument from those of the GM banks For example Strings Strings2 Strings3 Symphonic Timpani Geige Contrabass Tremolos elc F2 VOLUME you can adjust the volume of the 2ND VOICE Press the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together to set the value to O F3 OCTAVE you can set 2 octaves of the 2ND VOICE Figure 74 Press the CURSOR a gt buttons together to set the value to zero F4 TUNE you can adjust the fine pitch by 100 cent of semitone values from 63 to 64 F5 REVERB you can adjust the send level to the reverb Figure 75 Press the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together to set the value to 0 F6 EFFECT ASSIGN you can assign a second effect such as CHORUS or ECHO F7 EFFECT SEND you can adjust the send level of the second effect CHORUS or ECHO F8 SUSTAIN you can enable disable the SUSTAIN pedal on the second voice F9 SPLIT you can set the right split note for the second
162. he display enables the START function to start playback Once the track is playing the USER 4 and USER 2 buttons below the display enable the PAUSE and STOP functions respectively The F1 F10 buttons enable the following functions e F1 LEAD MUTE mute the volume of the melody track e F2 LYRIC ON shows the text lyric e F3 ZOOM OFF makes the text smaller e FA MARKER highlights the markers of the song e F5 MY FOLDERS when enabled by pressing one of the 0 9 numeric keypad in STYLE section that folder is recalled To store the position of a folder WAVE DJ LOOP MP3 etc hold to 0 9 button of the keypad Player When a track of the Player is playing the corresponding LED flashes The Remix On Off function works only when MIDIFILE is selected even if it is shown on the WAVE and MP3 player screens W Si Bi GK Su BEI wt Ca mum DJ o 0goOooo9o Figure 19 while the content of the folder is shown e F6 A PLAY ON enables the automatic sequential playback of the songs e F7 LOOP ON OFF enables disables the loop playback of one track e F6 GLOB LOCAL VIEW enables the global view or local view In LOCAL VIEW mode only the files by using the same extension e g WAV are shown In GLOBAL VIEW mode all the file types are shown Note that the TXT files are always shown e F7 SONG TR shows the transpose value previously stored in the song e F8 TRAN transpose the track in the
163. hord change accordingly to the correct harmony rules For example when you don t play again the root note or the fifth that you have just played The function works only with the styles in which the alternate root fifth bass was programmed 56 Style Mode maner oe Le SEELEN oe es po oF ee om ks roseg Lesen pen SE seng a wama Le Tuch Lean ut LE iE TE a il a a ee FER Lem Le z z s z z Figure 154 OG fee Tote m juntan zaa ATE o fren moe Aa ss Le besse Les eieiei pen Jeer per ges os cme Bn Poot Less m oi we ii SP Bami ri Ge D iJ s z s z z Figure 186 pe mm pat on ja E BETERZEM o es moe or ai Je ammenm oe Seet groe Ie a ii a a ee re Lem Be s z s z z Figure 157 KETRON e AUDYA 63 o Bi Te Sao T Wt BC ei Je Sao io Wu Bi Te Sao lar UL Bi Te IC Style Mode B CHORDS The USER 4 button CHORDS allows to access the chords settings Figure 158 You can select the CLOSE PARALLEL mode except Live Guitar and NORMAL RETRIGGER mode for the 5 chords of the Style In CLOSE mode the chords follow the intervals of the notes closer to conventional harmony rules In PARALLEL mode the notes of the chords will be transposed without changing the intervals F1 CHORD 1 CLOSE PARAL sets the Close or Parallel mode F2 CHORD 2 F3 CHORD 3 CLOSE PARAL CLOSE PARAL F4 CHORD 4
164. ide 4 applies a slide effect Slide Bend applies a note bending Soft Pitch applies a slight untuning By pressing the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together you can switch the parameter OFF F3 F8 MOD WHA Figure 101 you can assign a Modulation wheel control to each VOICE For example Pitch changes the pitch Filter changes the filter Amplitude changes the amplitude Cutoff changes the cutoff of the filter Pit Cutoff changes pitch and cutoff Pitch Filt changes pitch and filter Pit Fil Amp changes pitch filter and amplitude Wha To Pedal applies a wha wha effect to the pedal Wha To Wheel applies a wha wha effect to the wheel FA F9 BEND Figure 102 you can assign a Bend control to each VOICE For example Program CIR mme d kl dE or vce RU pe a ac Oe a ae dt WW reelle RI D OOOO Figure Ui Ri 00 ac z ao Go op oo Figuei100 Ui BI 00 C d g ao 6860050098 Figureto1 Qa GL ke E LJB Qu a 0999896599 Figure 102 Pitch changes the pitch Pit Ampl changes the pitch and the amplitude Pit Cutoff changes pitch and cutoff PittAmp Cutt changes pitch the amplitude and the cutoff Pit T VF changes pitch and the envelope of the filter Pit LFO changes pitch and LFO amount You can activate wha wha effect as User Assignable control KETRON e AUDYA 45 Registration A Registration stores a complete configuration of the panel Aud
165. idebellO1 54 TambourineO1 55 Crash04 56 CowbellO1 58 Vibraslap 59 Rided2 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empt 61 Bongo Low Sfx Kit Program Change 47 4 Empt 62 Belltree 5 Empt 6 Empt 7 Empt 65 Car Pass 66 Car Crash 9 Empt 20 Empt 68 Train 21 Empt 22 Empt 73 Machine Gun 26 Empt 27 Empt 28 Empt 77 Horse Gallop 80 Thunder 84 Bubble ech sch Lesch Lesch 14 Empty 17 Empty 19 Empty J i20Empty 21 Empty 22 Empty 23 Empt 24 Empt 25 Empt 26 Empty 27 Empty i2BEmpty 29 Empt 140 KETRON e AUDYA 39 Slap 40 Snare008 43 Sticks01 45 Metronome 01 51 Pfif amp Jew 53 Screaming 101 Empt 56 Foot Splash 59 Door Slam 60 Door Bell 61 Scratch Fx 109 Empt Orchestra Gm2 Program Change 48 62 Conga Slap 63 Conga Hi 65 Timbales Hi 66 Timbales Lo 68 Agogo Low 69 Cabasa 71 WhistleO1 72 WhistleO2 Z T CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO OCO OO CO 0000 3 GuiroO1 4 Guiro02 75 Claves01 28 Close01 76 W Block Hi 77 W Block Lo 30 Ride01 31 SticksO1 32 Click 80 TriangleO1 33 Metronome O1 81 Triangled2 82 Shaker01 83 Shaker02 36 Kick37 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshot01 38 Snare063 86 Kick40 87 Kick39 88 Applause 41 TimpaniO1 43 Timpani03 45 Timpani05 46 Timpani06 48 Timpani08 49 Timpani09 50 Timpani10 53 Timpani13 55 Crash04 56 CowbellO1 57 Crash09 58 Vibraslap 59 Crash07 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empt Orchestra Program Change 49 14 Snare001 62 Con
166. ile recording F2 MIDI SYNC RECORDING audio file recording synchronized with a MIDI file F5 SELECT SOURCE selection of the recording source that is SPDIF MP3 1 WAVE MICROPHONE VOICETRON F6 WAVE RECORDING WAV file recording F 10 UPDATE TIME LEFT calculates the available recording room on the disc Recording a WAV file 1 Press the MENU button and the F8 button AUDIO RECORDING to enter the audio recording environment Press the F6 button WAVE RECORDING to choose WAV file recording mode Press the RECORD button You will be prompted to give a name to the file Digit the name for the audio file directly from the keyboard Figure 275 In the example the file is AUDIO 01 Press the USER 5 button ENTER Press the F3 button NORMAL to set the normal recording or the F4 button MIXDOWN to make overdubbing see details later Play the keyboard and or sing on your microphone connected to the MICRO 1 connector enable the MICRO button in the VOICETRON section Be sure that the input level is not too high by checking the stereo VU Meter Figure 276 Press the USER 5 button START REC or the ENTER button to start recording It s also possible to press the MENU button to exit but keeping ready to record The REC button remains lit You can then start the recording at any time by simply pressing the REC button which will start blinking Press the USER 4 button STOP REC to stop recording A file
167. in the WAVE folder of the disk will be created Press the START button or the USER 5 button START to start playback of the recorded file To browse and select any recorded audio WAV file press the WAVE button in the Player section The recording volume is set by the WAVE slider on the PLAYER section 98 KETRON e AUDYA Em r pe j WI br RECORDING Ear a e a ya Lc Le oan re us z Figure 274 Uu Ga Sa gua gua 099989599898 Figure 275 go Ju In u go BC go 80 Qu BO o0gogOogooO Figure 276 Recording an MP3 file 1 Press the MENU button and the F8 button AUDIO RECORDING to enter the audio recording environment Press the F1 button MP3 RECORDING to choose MP3 recording Follow the same procedure for WAV file recording The recorded MP3 file will be created in the MP3 folder of the disk To browse and listen to the recorded MP3 file press the MP3 button in the Player section MIDI SYNC RECORDING file audio recording synchronized with a MIDI file 1 Press the MENU button and the F8 button AUDIO RECORDING to open the audio recording environment Press the F2 button MIDI SYNC RECORDING to show the list of MIDI files within the MIDIFILE folder on the disk Figure 277 Select a MIDI file from the list In the example the file is Cabaret MID Press the ENTER button to start simultaneously the audio recording of the MIDI file
168. inasnap Q 74Guiro0O2 Tb Claveso1 J aD e U 28 Snare008 76W Block Hi 29ScratchUp 77 W Block Lo 30Scratch Down 78 C uicaoa1 Metonome LU 4 I etronome C keck E JO CL D A L D 2 areng nare 41 Tom20 Ooko O AA KI BS Or A O DN O NO HS I INO kl O c 3 NA NO 44 Close02 4 om 46 Open0O 4 om 48 Tom24 49 Crash02 e s L D d Grunge Program Chang re e 85 e pulse OOD LU lt A UK ND OO MW O L L i A 23 Tom Flam02 71 WhistleO1 72 Whistle02 6 W_Block_Hi e A O U BU M LJ K Ld p L2 o O OKOKOKOKO N AIA RE RBRR bech sky COP DUO O KO CO TTC D KO KD n V 3 o E DE gt D 33 Metronome 01 81 TrianaleO2 34 Metronome 02 82 ShakerO1 35 Kick14 83 Shaker02 CO Ow 3E NS N e 3 36 Kick16 84 Sticks02 Contemporary Program Change 86 15 Rollo KETRON 0 AUDYA 147 Drum Set Electro Program Change 88 02 Empt 148 KETRON e AUDYA 83 Shaker02 89 Snare011 90 Snare009 44 Close 92 Stick02 45 Tom09 93 MiddleO3 46 OpenO1 94 Open 47 Tom10 95 Reverse 48 Tom11 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tom12 98 Empt 51 RideO1 99 Empt 52 Crash03 00 Empt 53 RidebellO1 01 Empt 54 TambourineO1 02 Empt 55 Crash04 103 Empt 56 CowbellO1 04 Empt 57 Crash05 05 Empt 58 Vibraslap 06 Empt 59 RideO3 07 Empt 60 Bongo Hi 08 Empt 61 Bongo Low 09 Empt JJ Qo LU 0
169. indow of the MENU 9 Press the MENU button to exit the MENU environment If you set the AUTOSWITCH TIME sec to OFF the AUTOSWITCH function will be switched off In this case if you want to return to the MAIN VIEW from other screens you must press manually the EXIT button on the front panel L ju Go go Coa XO ai KE oma AR GL cu D Main View Crema Pcs Me reis si ne Creer Feck FiF Viti ze Jee um Pam ra s keent geg mre onm Pate duelo Der fre en IA m s Keess ezine me T MBA n Ri EI LIE SS kat FON Loa DOG oOg C Pousi Ri gem Pai Hake rein Je ges EE Creta Fin wepip es d BC Face Tm a imrit tad rne cet Aa E s Jeegmmgen oe men get tnmen R taint ame pel se ort Jeepen Peste on BO et mt Le INN a di Ha Lowe Fa Em Soo 60000000 crite 41 KETRON e AUDYA 29 Main View Main View description Hereunder you can see the organization of the graphical layout of the MAIN VIEW window IT Sr Si T T Slow Ballad APRA D rd B MAIN VIEW Window D D BPM Tempo It shows the BPM Tempo set for the style or the current filely loaded in the Player When the Arranger or the Player are playing the red and green LED light accordingly to the musical division Transpose It shows the transpolf value of the right hand or of the current filely loaded in the Player Split It
170. ing Echo type Triple User1 and Triple User2 When you activate an Echo Preset you can set the option Lock On Off as for the previous Reverb and Chorus effects and the option Tap Enable Disable Figure 239 The Tap Enable Disable option allows to activate the Tap function of the Echo effect set into one PROGRAM In other words when Tap is active the delay of the effect will be synchronized accordingly to the current tempo The effect delay will be synchronized also if the tempo changes That is this parameter allows the effect to be automatically synchronized by the tempo change USER ECHO DELAY When you select one of the five custom Echo effects you can access the parameters of the corresponding effect by pressing the EDIT button on the front panel The Figure 240 shows the parameters for Mono User1 but the parameters are identical for Stereo User 1 Stereo User 2 Triple User 1 and Triple User 2 The only difference is the basic algorithm The parameters are the following F1 User Echo choose from 1 to 5 F2 LEVEL effect level values 0 63 F3 TIME effect time values 0 63 FA FEEDBACK feedback amount values 0 63 F5 FILTER filter amount values 0 63 F MASTER VOL master volume values 0 63 F8 LEFT VOL left channel volume values 0 63 F9 RIGHT VOL right channel volume values 0 63 F10 TAP MODE ON OFF enables disables the Tap mode If the parameter is disabled the effect will not be affected
171. iroO1 26 Fingsnap 01 4 Guiro02 28 Snare008 6W Block Hi 29 Scratch01 7 W Block Lo 30 Scratch02 8 Cuica01 31 SticksO01 9 Cuica02 32 Click O TriangleO1 33 Metronome 01 1 Triangled2 ie NINININ N OO 00 OO NI IN IN IN 2 ShakerO01 3 Shaker02 36 Kick51 4 Sticks02 37 Rimshot20 5 ClapO3 38 Snare054 6 TambourineO2 39 Clap04 7 Rimshot20 40 Snare031 8 Snare032 9 Snare033 0 Snare050 OO OO 109 COD CO 91 Kick47 44 Close05 92 Kick23 45 Tom28 93 Middle07 46 Middle08 47 Tom29 48 Tom30 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tom31 51 RideO1 52 Crash03 53 RidebellO1 54 El Percussion 55 Crash04 56 CowbellO1 58 Vibraslap 106 Empt 59 Rided2 60 Bongo Hi Hip Hop Program Change 30 62 Conga Slap 15 RollO1 63 Conga_Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom FlamO1 70 MaracasO01 23 Tom FlamO2 71 WhistleO1 72 WhistleO2 25 Snare007 73 Guiro01 74 Guiro02 75 ClavesO1 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 78 Cuica01 31 SticksO1 79 Cuica02 32 Click 80 TriangleO1 33 Metronome O1 81 IriangleO2 82 Shaker01 35 Kick49 83 Shaker02 36 Kick46 84 SticksO2 85 Clap02 38 Snare031 86 Tambourine02 39 Clap11 87 Rimshot20 88 Snare046 89 Snare051 42 MiddleO7 90 SnareO061 91 Kick19 92 Kick21 93 Stick12 46 OpenO5 94 Stick18 95 Reverse 48 T om30 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97
172. is playing on the Player see the details on page 21 the DRUM BASS CHORD and LOWER faders marked by MIDIMIX in blue letters adjust the volumes of the DRUM BASS ORCHESTRA and LEAD tracks respectively in the following way DRUM adjusts the volume of the drum track BASS adjusts the volume of the bass track ORCHESTRA adjusts all the other tracks LEAD adjusts the volume of the melody track usually on MIDI channel 4 STYLE MASTER VOLUME j RIGHT HAND da SECOND VOCE CT apri a LOW ORAND CONCERT GHSMI TE DA E GRAND POP BRIGHT Prem taiecin STYLE PARTS a a T m VOLUMES BI Figure 18 Player The Player section is a complete multimedia environment for live performances It s a mixer consisting of five faders allowing volume control over WAVE DJ LOOP MP3 SFX and MIDI file The five buttons above the faders switch on off in order to select the tracks for the mix PLAYER B WAVE The WAVE button enables the WAVE screen where you select the audio track to start playback Figure 19 The fader below adjusts the volume of the track To navigate in this screen use the cursor buttons the ENTER and EXIT buttons e CURSOR A V buttons or the wheel scrolls up down the titles e ENTER button opens the selected folder s EXIT button exits from the selected folder e CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons when the title is too long scroll the letters of the titles e The USER 5 button below t
173. itch the DRAWBARS mode on For the selection of the different Drawhars I3 organ types please see Selecting the organ Za DRAWBARS on page 16 J B RI CIR DCH Creating a new organ DRAWBARS Sa ag To create a new type of organ Drawbars select Oa Sao one of the 20 organs available from the two e a d DRAWBARS pages Figure 195 t9 C g g g Si C 1 Press the EDIT button on the front panel to access the edit window The F1 F10 buttons allow to access the following parameters Figure 196 F1 PERCUSS ON OFF enables disables the organ percussion F2 HARMON 2nd 8rd adds even odd harmonics to the percussion Figure 195 F3 DECAY decay of the percussion 0 7 78 7 us F4 VOLUME volume of the percussion EAR SS ao 0 63 Oo Aiii og F5 CLICK click volume 0 63 uu F6 SUSTAIN Sustain amount 0 16 DH HHH O F BS BOOST bass boost 0 63 Figure 196 F8 REVERB Reverb amount 0 63 F9 CHORUS Chorus amount 0 63 F10 OVERDR Distortion amount 0 to 63 2 Setthe DRAWBARS values by moving the 9 Sie x M aim sliders of the MIXER section independently AR RL Figure 197 Ga Hi 3 Press the USER 5 button SAVE to store Ja MBA the organ DRAWBARS setting The store 5 a an position is the same of the current organ o d C O s s z z z Bea 197 In DRAWBARS mode if you press the USER 1 button PedToRotor you can activate the rotor by using the pedal connect
174. ithout altering the tonality of the Arranger AUTO this mode lets you play 3 or more notes for chord recognition and then play the melody with one or two note max without altering the tonality of the Arranger Style Mode WO etka cru cm luno rk om 1 Naa vm Lem rm e FRAMED TRENT eg aa cm d mam eta om Lee we fur Bp av cnra E TyTN GE S pa EF 5 a 7 mmm mme m m xr e O z s z s Figure 138 7 B os La kan Ce o Fer MERIT aes ins aca or mantera a Leg neg teri 1 p EHI Hli CHE o a on om e am AA no atus ET ms mere Less Jesse Gi se RH POET GATES Ch cx leet Fa pg PRH SEI D I n ue LJ set L ge RON Tiuk 5 g P Lee Ass fA db a Can D Ei z s z s T 140 a mes gail a panona Lo maer ux o Joes we Lr m c moo omm 2 com od pen em gm o eeng al al a aT D Dm Bel em LOW T i a et QU tU z d z z Figure 141 KETRON 0 AUDYA D I oC B 00 o Ino ES Mj Wan ao Inc EN H BG Bt o nc E HI B Le Si J Nao Ino Style Mode PIANIST SUSTAIN When this parameter is ON or OFF Figure 142 enables disables the Sustain Pedal control on Pianist when this is activated PRESET MIX When this parameter is ON Figure 143 the Styles play the original fact
175. layed on the screen Press the USER 5 button Drw Lock Unlock below the display to toggle Lock Unlock function so you Can use the faders for mixing the Arranger parts or the MIDI file tracks instead of the DRAWBARS For advanced operations about the DRAWBARS see on page 31 B Selecting the GM General MIDI voices 1 Press the GM button on the third row in the VOICE section The display will show a list of the GM voices Figure 10 Follow the same procedure for voices selection described on page 14 16 KETRON e AUDYA g D GL Toco Ju c 3 E y AUC uij 00 C m CH ST SUU BALLAL rg is wia Hj DG x e en tes i De GNI A IE rS RGA IR GAM i IR GARG Beet Lire ee dpa c3 bearer un pads eent Lowes E rix JW u bls eg Seet Figure 10 Selecting the styles Selecting styles The numeric keypad of the STYLE section allows the selection of twelve style families divided into various musical genres 4 5 PARTY ROCK B LATIN de UNPLUGGED FOLK BALLROOM B Selecting a PRESET style LL EA Tu i GE AH FJA zr INI E Fr ore F z Zn i 1 Select one style family by pressing one of the JU eae MW twelve buttons of the keypad in the STYLE CIR EE mni section For example press the POP family A HEN Ru JA penna Ras button gr Liers ees die AS 2 The display will show the first ten available styles
176. lter F1 Right F2 Left F3 Bass F4 Drums F5 ALL PARTS F6 Global global channel of the keyboard F7 Registration F8 Voicetron F9 ARRANGER CHORDS opens another window F10 VOICE DRAWBAR opens another window Select the MIDI transmission filter options by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel Press the CURSOR a gt buttons to set the FILTERED value to activate the filter or the value to deactivate the filter The filter options are the following Figure 213 214 215 Il NRP A 78 KETRON e AUDYA EXPRESSION Sust Soft Sost PORTAMENTO WHA S Mono Poly WHA ADSR ADSR 0 CUTOFF 0959599589 Figure 212 O0gOQgO9g9 Figure 213 Zeen ems ire owas C g ad ae Gem WEG N ETE Ti um Liew SI WC sd o 0065458458 Figure 214 099995 89 Figure 215 l BC pt o no Tq ui ucj BC TRANPOSE TX From the first screen of the MIDI menu by pressing the F3 button a window will appear where to set the MIDI transmission of the parts transposition By using the F1 F10 buttons or the CURSOR A V buttons you can select the parts to transpose via MIDI transmission as shown in Figure 216 By using the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel you can assign 36 semitones transposition value in 1 semitone steps By pressing the CURSOR a gt together you set the default value that is no transposition
177. m as User Cho1 User Cho2 User Cho3 User Cho4 and User Cho5 The Figure 236 shows the parameters of User Cho1 that you can modify by using the F1 F10 buttons and the CURSOR a gt buttons or the DATA VALUE F1 User Cho choose from 1 to 5 F2 LEVEL Chorus level values 0 63 F3 TIME Chorus time values 0 63 F4 MODE Chorus mode Chorus Flanger Tremolo and Phaser F7 FEEDBACK feedback amount values 0 63 F8 DEPTH Chorus depth values 0 63 F9 RATE Chorus rate values 0 63 84 KETRON e AUDYA Oa ga SL e Il n Oo m SES Figure 234 ja ui Cp uiJ go LS Qu 80 Qu a oO900000R Figure 235 St Ki Plu ju Ri go MBA ae o Qu a Figure 236 By pressing the CURSOR a gt buttons together you set the value to 0 After you set the parameters you can to store the custom Chorus by pressing the USER 5 button SAVE or the SAVE button on the front panel A brief SAVE DATA TO DISK message will appear ECHO DELAY By pressing the F3 button on the DSP page you can access the ECHO DELAY screen as shown in Figure 237 Here you can make the selection of the ECHO DELAY type to set into the DSP in order to make it available for PROGRAMS from which you can choose an ECHO algorithm Figure 238 10 Echo Presets are available in the first page and 10 in the second by pressing any CURSOR button or the DATA VALUE wheel Press any F1 F10 button to select the correspond
178. message SAVE DATA TO DISK will appear 1 D ga Ee Sie Oo Z o 08689 Figure 244 OGESEGSEEG D ga Sa u Qu xx Figure 245 o0goOOOC Figure 246 KETRON 0 AUDYA 87 EQUALIZER By pressing the F7 button on the DSP page you can access the EQUALIZER screen as shown in Figure 247 Here you can select the EQUALIZER type to set as global equalization of the keyboard 5 Equalizer Presets are available Just press one of the F1 F5 buttons to select the corresponding Equalizer type Equalizer1 Equalizer5 When you activate an Equalizer Preset you can set the option Lock On Off as for the previous effects By pressing the EDIT button on the front panel you can access the parameters of the selected Equalizer Preset as shown in Figure 248 The parameters are identical for all the five Equalizer effects F1 Equalizer choose from 1 to 5 F2 BASS FREQ bass frequency values 80 970 Hz F3 MID BASS FREQ mid bass frequency values 1050 1770 Hz F4 MID TREBLE FREQ mid high frequency values 3020 5290 Hz F5 TREBLE FREQ high frequency values 6090 14830 Hz F BASS GAIN bass gain values 12 dB F8 MID BASS GAIN mid bass gain values 12 dB F9 MID TREBLE GAIN mid high gain values 12 dB F10 TREBLE GAIN high gain values 12 dB Press the USER 1 button ACTIVE to enable the Equalizer as shown by the arrow on Figure 248 The USER 2 button DEFAULT resets th
179. meters of the voice up to five voices Volume Pan Formant Detune Cutoff Resonance F8 EQUALIZER 10 bands graphic equalizer F9 EFFECTS parameters of the effects F10 VOCAL TO ARR the vocalizer effect changes accordingly to the Arranger parts For example you can set a DUET effect for the START a TRIO effect for the A variation of the Arranger a VOCODER effect for the B variation of the Arranger and so on For details see on page 104 26 KETRON e AUDYA Sa ee eC U ENXILIZHN o U Em aaa iesus OE Le t nc WE d l a ii ogocoQgococogo Figure 32 a 3 H NS VOSGES ERT z Ow m cL Si TO coe EE mn E We Oa LIB ee soo e E O O KO CO KE Figure 33 Master The Master fader is located at right of the Voicetron section and adjusts the global volume of the instrument It features a FADE function Sa BC which enables an automatic fade out during sga eg playback that is a gradual smooth volume m m reduction to zero QU i EE gem WK gmp Leslie ao Cj g mum m DEED Le n 5 wo e Mm WW Ej DO OO OO OC Figure 34 B FADE By pressing the FADE button the LED flashes and the volume will be reduced gradually accordingly to the CROSSFADE settings Please see MENU gt KEYBOARD CONTROL gt UTILITY gt NEXT PAGE Figure 34 Once the fade out is over the LED of the FADE button turns off THe FADE
180. nare023 91 MiddleO2 44 Close 92 Stick03 93 Close02 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 51 Ride03 52 Crash03 53 RidebellO1 101 Empt 54 TambourineO1 55 Crash04 56 CowbellO1 57 Crash05 58 Vibraslap 106 Empt 59 Rided4 60 Bongo Hi 61 Bongo Low 109 Empt o 2 ae UU O Q Q 3 C 2 fo 5 Q D Co 14 Snare039 5 RollO1 17 Snare002 62 Conga Slap 63 Conga Hi 64 Conga Low 65 Timbales Hi 14 Snare039 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare002 KETRON 0 AUDYA 145 Drum Set 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom Flam01 23 Tom FlamO2 71 WhistleO1 24 Crash09 72 WhistleO02 25 Snare065 73 GuiroO1 26 Fingsnap 01 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 31 SticksO3 32 Click 80 TriangleO1 33 Metronome 01 81 Triangled2 82 Shaker01 35 Kick37 83 Shaker02 36 Kick35 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshot10 38 Snare040 86 Tambourine02 39 Snare037 87 Rimshot19 88 Snare041 89 Snare042 90 Snare038 91 MiddleO1 93 Close02 96 Applause 49 Crash08 97 Belltree 50 Tom48 51 Ride06 53 Ridebell02 55 Splash 103 Empt 56 CowbellO1 57 Crash06 58 Vibraslap 60 Bongo Hi 61 Bongo Low 109 Empt Garage Program Change 82 62 Conga Slap 15 RollO1 63 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare002 65 Timbales Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 22 Tom FlamO1 70 Maracas01 23 Tom FlamO2 71
181. nd Phaser3 Flanger1 Flanger2 and Flanger3 User1 User2 User User4 and User5 see details later After you select the effect for the right hand you can hear the result by playing directly on the right split of the keyboard To lock the Chorus also when changing Program or Registration or at start up press the Lock ON button corresponding to the USER 1 button Figure 234 After the effect type selection exit by pressing the EXIT button or directly by pressing the MENU button To store the Chorus type at start up press the SAVE button on the front panel and F6 CUSTOM STARTUP CHORUS LEFT GM From the CHORUS page by pressing the F2 button LEFT GM REVERB you can access the page for the selection of the Chorus for the left hand and the GM parts Figure 234 The available Chorus Preset are the same of those for the right hand seen before To lock the Chorus also when changing Program or Registration or at start up press the Lock ON button corresponding to the USER 1 button as shown by the arrow on Figure 234 After the effect type selection exit by pressing the EXIT button or directly by pressing the MENU button USER CHORUS When you select the Chorus for the right hand or the left hand and the GM parts you can choose one of the 5 USER CHORUSES Figure 235 corresponding to the F6 F10 buttons of the second CHORUS page By pressing the EDIT button on the front panel you can customize the User Chorus and store the
182. note Accordion functions with international and Belgian system Controllable dynamics of bass and chords Octave selectable on manual bass and chord Manual drum on bass and chords 3 new multi effect DSPs Reverb chorus flanger delay phaser tremolo tap delay 4 8 wha wha distortion overdrive slow fast rotor parameters 4 band equalizer 2 microphone inputs with separate gain control 10 band equalizer echo reverb pan pitch shift talk voice transformation Harmonizer with 5 separate voices by Ketron Vocoder mode auto harmony by using the arranger vocalizer track on MIDI file advanced editing on all 5 voices In 1 In 2 Out Thru 32 MIDI channels GM2 Standard OUTPUTS Left mono right 4 separate assignable outputs 2 stereo or 4 mono Digital S PDIF input and output Stereo headphone INPUTS 2 XLR microphone inputs 2 line in inputs 2 stereo or 2 mono Sustain and pedal volume Footswitch 6 or 13 switches VIDEO INTERFACE Systems PAL NTSC Super VHS VGA monitor mirror zoom karaoke Screen size and positioning DSP EFFECTS MICROPHONE 1 amp 2 S A A A O e 7 S g z S controls Resolution 640x480 INCLUDED Video interface hard drive Voicetron vocalizer power cord user manual music rest ACCESSORIES OPTIONAL Hard case sustain pedal piano type volume pedal pedal controls FS6 FS13 MIDI bass pedals ACCESSORIES Automatic voltage detection 110V 60Hz 240V 50Hz plug and play
183. nt 14 0 127 16 Pitch to MIDI level threshold this parameter adjusts the input signal level under which no MIDI note will be output You may want to raise this threshold in a noisy environment for instance to avoid unwanted short MIDI notes to be triggered during silent or low level sections consonants This parameter may also be used to reduce artifacts on note onsets in conjunction with NRPN 96 12 The shift amount to O enabling this mode and playing the loop the developer can tweak the sensitivity parameter by listening to what audio events the algorithm considers as the critical sections to preserve There must be enough of them but not too many see warning above Note enabling this mode without being in drum mode will result in muting the shifter no beat is detected when not in drum mode so no sound will be output 154 KETRON e AUDYA B Lead voice NRPN NRPN NRPN Data MSB Default value Parameter MSB LSB 97 00 0 127 127 Lead level input voice output level 7 E 0 64 127 64 Lead pan same as control 10 on lead MIDI channel LC Voice transform parameters 40 64 88 Transpose 24 0 24 semitones 0 64 127 Formant formant control Tone frequency low pass filter resonance frequency 2 4 5 om Jan Je Tone resonance low pass filer resonance ieren ibrato delay 0 3 seconds B Harmony voices NRPN NRPN NRPN Data MSB Default value Parameter MSB LSB 0 127 Harmony global l
184. nt return to the MAIN VIEW and operate from the new functions 32 KETRON e AUDYA LJ ms go Qu Qu z a WK GAN LR ir D CELES TA VEPs UO OO et E Ki ker L en How Ballad GRAND PLANO JG KE Hi Bi Te DC Ino T Hi uc DC mno IQ LUC BC Le 56000000 Pu 50 WAVE Player MAIN VIEW From the MAIN VIEW window you can select directly the WAV file on disc B Selecting a WAV file from the MAIN VIEW 1 The default MAIN VIEW window allows the selection of MIDI files For this reason it s necessary to press the WAVE button of the Player The list of the WAV file of the WAVE folder will appear Figure 51 Select a WAV file from the list using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel Our example is Funky Tune wav Press the ENTER button to start playback of the WAV file Press the USER 3 HOME button to activate the MAIN VIEW window as shown by the arrow of Figure 51 The MAIN VIEW window will appear and on the right side the list of WAV files on the disc Figure 52 If the WAV file contains lyric the LYRIC window will appear in place of the list as illustrated in Figure 53 The USER buttons from 1 to 4 in the MAIN VIEW window will have the following functions USER 1 PAUSE CONTINUE USER 2 STOP USER 3 LEAD ON OFF melody mute USER 4 EXIT exit from the Lyric or MAIN VIEW window By pressing the F3 button or F4 a second time while the
185. o 2 o m o 128 KETRON e AUDYA O e lt Z um NO O gt O NINININ O CO OO N oo N C1 2 S4STRNGS 3 o a 4STRINGS 10 o2 a 4STRINGS 11 3 e 4STRINGS 12 o4 a 4STRINGS 13 05 a 4STRINGS 4 06 a 4STRINGS 15 o7 a 4STRINGS 16 3 a 4STRINGS 2 esch Co CO e Co 7 8 4STRINGS 6 3 4STRINGS 7 39 BANJO 13 BANJO 3 BANJO 5 BANJO 6 ANJO 7 BANJO 8 BANJO 9 GUIT 1 8GUIT 2 8GUIT 3 Co O CO 41 09 96 98 99 100 3 esch G C2 C2 O O1 rh CO o UJ 37 Co 0 8GUIT T 8 8PIANO 1 8PIANO 2 8PIANO 3 8PIANO 4 8PIANO T 1 2 8PIANO T 2 8PIANO T 3 8PIANO T 4 8PIANO T 5 25 8PIANO T 6 8PIANO T 7 8 8STRINGS 1 109 BSTRINGS 2 8STRINGS 3 11 8STRINGS 4 112 8STRINGS 5 8STRINGS 6 8STRINGS 7 115 8STRINGS T 1 16 8STRINGS T 2 8SYNT 1 8SYNT 2 8SYNT 3 8SYNT T 1 31 8SYNTT 2 8SYNT T 3 33 8SYNT T 4 8SYNT T 5 35 8SYNT T 6 8SYNT T 7 8SYNT T 8 38 8SYNT T 9 ech Co eo N PO NTN NOP pp sss ss JL sch N Gi O AB m oi dc o o ocw1i 5 co0 nm wech ech O esch wesch AC 28 29 amp Co C2 CO Sg NIO A NO O N Live Guitar o0o o o ud ca d aa T Tnm m SES ARIS N 35 6 8MARCH 3 36 6 8MARCH 2 B ELECT 7 eB FOLK 4 BALLAD
186. o O PAN POT USER 3 By pressing PAN POT you can set the stero position of the single percussive parts of the drum by using the F1 F10 buttons and the DATA VALUE wheel or by using the CURSOR a gt buttons 68 KETRON e AUDYA p m 7 Jal JI e La keen ml tos Es loss Ti rb RS ce Ere aam mmu K K iw s z JU g Figure 172 Giel Ca es o Ja ma je Si SC 20 ques a S Sech wll u z z s z OQ Figure 173 TS ano 9 Pl reg Mac M Oogoo kx a Jeer a a ku o mer ajue J uc p aem 8 a aE B E cM Ei BI CH CH D j Nm Bl LINE LOwI WER c2 WE z s z OQ Figure 175 Bi Te 00 80 Soo E The available values are from 64L to and to 63H that is totally to the left in the centre and totally to the right Figure 176 By pressing the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together you set the PAN value in the centre gt lt E DRUM REMAP USER 4 By pressing DRUM REMAP you can access the window where to set a custom map for the percussive parts of the drum By using the F1 F10 buttons you can select the percussion and then assign the instrument directly to one note of the keyboard By using the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR a gt buttons you can select the available drum sound Figure 177 Please note that when the assigned instrument changes an asterisk appears after
187. o ON zement Sea EX qol rs uo Loading an INS block mer vo ru After storing the INS block it will be on the internal el kel Ea EO DI disc Se e Sa SCH 8t 1 Press the RAM INS SUPERSOLO button from CIB mom 3 atc the front panel vi 2 Scroll the files by using the CURSOR A V oO PY P oO of PA Ff buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel and localize 2 z z z z z z G the file MY SUPERSOLO RBK previously Figure 200 stored on disc Figure 200 3 Press ENTER on the front panel to load the INS block and all its instruments at one time Figure 201 Si Ki Hi go 00 go 00 Qu a Qe EI Z Zuuu Figure 201 While loading the INS voices if there is not enough room in memory a warning message will appear When you can access to RAM INS section you can find the folder called SUPERSOLO containing high quality exclusive for AUDYA orchestral voices inviting to free one or more memory locations of INS voices by using the F2 button CLEAR SELECT or the F6 button CLEAR ALL 4 KETRON e AUDYA Voice List By pressing the VOICE LIST button in the VOICE section the screen of the custom voices will appear For each of the 16 VOICES the first two rows you can access the VOICE LIST button with 20 memory locations each In this way you can customize your favourite voice lists to be used for each voice family B Storing a VOICE LIST 1 2 Select one voice by pressing any keys in the VOICE section For example EL
188. o User2 riple User1 Triple User2 For the DIST effect Figure 82 you can choose from the following types Overdrive1 Overdrive2 Overdrive3 ube 1 Tube 2 Distorsion1 Distorsion2 Distorsion3 Hyper Dist UZZ Hot British Org Over 1 Org Over 2 Org Over 3 Over User1 Over User2 Dist User1 Dist User2 Dist Users When you set a distortion please consider that the volume of the VOICE represents the volume to the distortion input and the DISTORSOR item in EFF SEND represents the output of the distortion e F5 ROTOR ON OFF you can enable disable the ROTOR effect Figure 83 You can control the speed by using the SLOW and FAST buttons of the ROTOR section on the panel e F10 SUST PEDAL TO ROTOR ON OFF you can enable disable the functionality of the ROTOR effect to the sustain pedal Figure 84 connected to the SUSTAIN connector on the rear panel EFF SEND The USER 4 button will open a screen like Figure 85 where you can modify the effects send parameters In this way you can hear the effects assigned in the EFF MODE page Once you select a parameter you can modify its value by using the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR a buttons Use the function F1 F6 buttons to select one of three VOICES of the PROGRAM The values of the parameters for EFF ASSIGN and EFF TYPE are strictly connected to the parameters of the EFF SEND page You coud not hear any effect until you adjust the sends in the EFF SEND page as
189. of the available quartet effects by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel Standard Jazz Block Chord Down Block Chord Up 108 KETRON AUDYA 0999595989 Figure 306 0999595989 Figure 307 SKS Figure308 OB mr me Qu me UU LA Bi Bi Bi Um amt iia irm ee EI diiin 0999595989 Figure 309 UJ ag ao UJ ag 00 ao TC BC Ino um uu Voicetron QUINTET By pressing the F4 button the list of QUINTET effects similar to Figure 310 will appear from which you can choose one of the available quintet effects by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel tandard Open E rere Octave Down D Ei E CH E Ki G amp G we extet Open Figure 310 FIXED INTERV By pressing the F5 button the list of FIXED INTERV effects similar to Figure 311 will appear from which you can choose one of the available fixed interval effects by using the CURSOR A Y buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel Duet Female Up 5th Down Duet femal Down Trio Female Male Sextet Female Male ead 5th Down d a Ee A 3rd Major Up o uu s s QU Figure 311 VOCODER By pressing the F6 button the list of VOCODER effects similar to Figure 312 will appear from which you can edit the parameters of the vocoder effect Select a parameter with the CURSOR A W buttons and change the value by using the DATA VALUE wheel ASSIGN values Right Left
190. on au Im Wees vibrato delay 0 3 seconds ss e ue Im Vocezvivodesy aa om o ue Im Vocedvivaodeay s9 a oi Im eerst p Im oer o Voice Stato dey 0 127 Voice 1 humanization amount humanization applies small pitch variations extracted from the input signal to Lai the E voices sound more natural s e o vore2humanzatonamout s e o Jm Voeghumanzaionamout s e o Jm Voted4humanzaionamout om a o Jm VoteShumanzaionamout s a oi o ee tportamento switch s e au o voce2pornamenoswteh s ss au o voce3pornamenoswteh s a om o voce4pornamenoswteh so ss aen VoteSpotamemoswibh s se om Io Voceipotammtotme s e o Ia VoteZpotamemo me s ss o 2 voce3ponamenotme II am Im e Ia Voice 4 portamento time 99 60 0 127 Voice 5 portamento time 156 KETRON e AUDYA B Effects NRPN 84H Compressor 0 Off 1 127 On m rT Attack time 0 fast attack 0 1 ms 60 1ms 100 10ms 127 slow attack 100ms exp curve m op pm Release time 0 fast release 10ms 60 100 ms 100 21 s 127 slow release 5s exp curve 100 03 m op exe Threshold 127 0dB 96 6dB 64 12dB 45 18dB 32 24dB 16 36dB 8 48dB 0 64dB 100 Ratio 127 1 128 128 1 126 2 128 64 1 125 3 128 64 64 128 2 1 0 1 1 100 Boost applied to signal after compression 127 x8 64 x4 32 x2 16 to 02x1 100 rpm rn Compressor pr
191. on page Section pg 2 Press the F1 F10 buttons to activate the sections as shown in Figure 106 You can enable disable the following sections F1 EFFECTS Effects settings F2 MICRO Mic settings F3 VOICETRON Voicetron settings F4 DRUM MIXER Drum Mixer settings F5 MIDI SETTING MIDI settings F6 UTILITY Utility page settings F7 ARABIC Arabic scale settings F8 FOOTSWITCH Footswitch settings F9 KEYBOARD PARAM Keyboard parameters settings F10 AUTO SWITCH OFF Autoswitch settings Once enabled disabled all the sections in the Section pg 1 and Section pg 2 you can 46 KETRON e AUDYA ao ao Inc a m o0000009 oC n0 ei Je Sao D ao A EE oo0goOoQgooO0 Figura toa oC Le etet Jemen CT ya wa aro jy gente i datz W EE oogoO0oQgooO o0gogOUOcOO Figure 106 press the USER 5 button SAVE to store the REGISTRATION again An overwrite confirmation message will appear By pressing ENTER you will overwrite the current REGISTRATION while the EXIT button cancels the operation B Recalling a SINGLE REGISTRATION 1 To recall a REGISTRATION from the list on the window you can use the CURSOR A Y tj buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel to select Bg a REGISTRATION and then press the ENTER g button Figure 107 7 at DER EE i 2 Torecall a REGISTRATION you can also use the E em S sm mt Sia on 0
192. onal FS13 pedalboard has 13 functions to which you can assign any parameter of the keyboard By using the CURSOR A V buttons select one of the 13 functions of the pedal and assign one of the parameters of the table below by using the CURSOR A W buttons or the DATA VALUE Sostenuto After Fill Arr Mute Inter Gtr Manual Bass Bas Mono Poly wing Bass BassToRoot Bass Sust BassToLowest ower Mute ow Off Stop ower1 Hold ower2 Hold ianistPianistSust Accordion well eft Drum ade Out Crash lay Kick1 lay Kick2 Drum amp Bass Kick Off VoiceListTo Arr Auto Fill Once you set the FOOTSWITCH parameters you can save them by pressing the USER 5 button SAVE or the SAVE button on the front panel A brief SAVE DATA TO DISK message will appear UTILITY By pressing the F9 button from the KEYBOARD i Cy Hat Off mbal Off Sr Portamento CONTROL page you can activate the UTILITY screen 05 Figure 263 where you can enable disable the uc following functions SSS Ee E SC F1 SPDIF In enables disables the digital SPDIF In com E e mJ port values ON OFF jg SS ad F2 SPDIF Out enables disables the digital SPDIF CJD ua is at Out port values SPDIF MAIN The SPDIF volume k is controlled by using the S PDIF LINE IN SFX 65 EI oo oO O9 C slider of the PLAYER section F3 Edit Value Recycle enables disables the recycle of the volume effect send etc parameters type Values ON OFF F4
193. onnection of one a dynamic microphone Volume pedal optional 4 Micro 1 2 Foot Switch Standard combo mono jack for the connection of Standard multipolar connector for an optional a dynamic microphone pedal to control internal functions Gain 1 d3 MIDI Gain adjustment of the signal input level of the Standard MIDI IN IN2 KEYB MIDI OUT and MIDI Micro 1 jack THRU jacks 6 Main Out USB Device Two standard mono jacks for main right left Standard USB port type B for the connection to or mono RIGHT LEFT MONO outputs to be a personal computer connected to a PA system 4 Video Interface 7 Aux Out Standard VGA jack for the connection to an Four standard mono jacks as auxiliary outputs external video VGA monitor to be connected to monitors mixers outboard Main Switch Fuse effects etc Standard AC power connection 220 V with ON S PDIF OFF switch and protection fuse Standard RCA connectors for stereo digital input and output with digital devices CD Player digital console etc USB connectors on the front side On the front panel there are two USB ports D USB connector 1 type A for easy connection to USB devices USB connector for pen drives and other USB such as pen drives card readers etc devices card readers players hard disk etc For the connection to a computer please use 2 USB connector 2 the USB connector on the rear panel The same of USB 1 c Along the keyboard from C3 to E6 you can find letters
194. ory mix While in OFF position you can freely adjust the volumes of the sections of the Arranger by using the sliders AUTOFILL When this parameter is ON Figure 144 the drum plays automatically a Fill In when passes from a variation of the Arranger to another AFTER FILL When this parameter is ON Figure 145 the drum plays the Fill In if you apply an Aftertouch on the left split FILL TO ARRANGE When this parameter is ON Figure 146 each time you activate the Fill In causes the automatic change to the next variation 60 KETRON AUDYA Cim am SS ra a Gef Em EH i Oo mam o etin ha ao Ge d d a n Ce Mag z See QO Kip Om Auc el SEN ES zm E BC om Ele 00 ga mM B Gei Se sod Gro A eO 5 G g z OO Figure 143 on Ee m i jin Panis u oppe ap E m ut 0o part aena o oeae t1 og gu eem o dene ln ao S mum um pranicem E7 D Deo QOOCOUCOCOJ Figure 144 E c POEET LET fa mul ot or m m ipo ae Jm same Dn Ls DT Bee Ce a Dog Sto ifthe T al ET Doe bei DOND Jum Di z s Jg g S Figure 145 rm emm T ac ea eet ut pe gail om BEE el iro an Im NR no ruat nam CHE RY Qe EE reg ev DEOYCTOMAD DU E COO JJ s g g O Figure 146 CHORD MODE Once CHORD MODE is selected you can choose among four operative modes for the automatic chords by using the CURSOR ag gt
195. ourine02 39 Clap11 87 Rimshot20 88 Snare087 89 Snare051 42 Stick06 90 Snare061 43 Tom08 91 Kick19 92 Kick02 45 Tom09 93 Stick10 46 MiddleO1 94 Stick18 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tom12 51 RideO1 52 Crash03 esch 53 RidebellO1 55 Crash04 56 Cowbell01 57 Crash05 58 Vibraslap 59 RideO3 60 Bongo Hi 08 Empt 09 Empt m 142 KETRON e AUDYA Modern Program Change 62 5 Pollo 6 Roll02 4 Conga Low 5 Timbales Hi 8 Snare003 6 Timbales Lo 9 Snare004 0 Snare005 8 Agogo Low 1 Snare006 9 Cabasa 2 Tom Flam01 3 Tom Flam02 1 WhistleO1 2 Whistle02 5 Snare098 3 Guiro01 4 Guiro02 5 Claves01 8 Snare008 6 W Block Hi 9 Scratch Up 7 W Block Lo 0 Scratch Down 8 Cuica01 9 Cuica02 O TriangleO1 1 Triangled2 4 Metronome 02 2 Shaker01 M 74 lp INN IN 102 090 O O G O O OO O9 O9 OO WIN IN IN 5 Kick57 3 ShakerO2 4 Sticks02 8 Snare100 6 TambourineO2 9 Clap13 O0 Snare090 8 Snare066 9 Snare067 0 Snare088 1 Middleo1 2 Stick02 3 Close02 6 OpenO8 8 Tom39 9 Crash10 0 Tom39 1 Ride08 3 Ridebell03 4 TambourineO1 6 CowbellO1 8 Vibraslap 9 Ride09 08 Empt 61 Bongo Low 09 Empt Custom Program Change 65 14 Snare001 62 Conga Slap 2 O O O O O O O O CO 00 00 00 CO 00 00 sch LB 32 Click 80 TriangleO1 33 Metronome 01 81 Triangle02 31 Sticks01 79 Cuica02 Drum Set Pop Jazz Program Change 73 62 Conga Slap 15 RollO1 3 Conga Hi 16 Roll02 4 Conga Low
196. ress the DISK button to see the content of the internal disk Figure 341 The disk contains a certain number of folders that you can access by using the CURSOR A V or the DATA VALUE wheel The content is DJ LOOP MIDIFILE MP3 PLAYLIST SFX STYLES WAVE INSTRUMENTS REGISTRATION SYSTEM Press the ENTER button to enter the selected folder Press the EXIT button to exit the selected folder and jump to the parent folder Press the USER 5 button DISK MENU to list all the available functions Figure 342 F1 COPY copies one or more files F2 DELETE deletes one or more files F3 MOVE moves one or more files F4 RENAME rename a file F5 SAVE open a screen to save PROGRAM GM VOICE VOICE LIST DRAWBAR DRUMSET F6 NEW FOLDER creates a new folder F7 DEL FOLDER deletes a folder Copy delete and move In order to execute the copy delete and move functions first select one or more files by using the ENTER button A blue dot near to each selected file will appear Figure 343 Press the F1 button COPY F2 DELETE or F3 MOVE to select the appropriate function Press the USER 5 button EXECUTE to execute the selected function or the USER 4 button EXIT to cancel the operation Create or delete a folder Press the F6 button to create a new folder Give a name by inputting the characters from the keyboard In the example the folder name is NEW FOLDER Press the USER 5 button EXECUT
197. ress the START button USER 5 or the ENTER button or the START button on the panel The WAVE track starts playback and its LED flashes Press the MP3 button Select an MP3 file from the list Figure 25 Press the ENTER button The CROSSFADE button flashes while crossfading the two tracks accordingly to the CROSSFADE settings see MENU KEYBOARD CONTROL gt UTILITY gt NEXT PAGE Figure 26 9 The volume of the WAVE track decreases while the MP3 track volume increases up to the level set by its fader Both LEDs of the tracks will flash during the CROSSFADE When the CROSSFADE is finished the LED of the WAVE track lights steadily while the LED of the MP3 track flashes 10 Note that you can apply the same procedure to any other tracks Gr OM Player If you want to create a MIX using all the five tracks just press the ENTER button when you select the files Be sure that the CROSSFADE LED is off For example 1 Press the WAVE button select a file from the WAVE folder and press ENTER 2 Press the DJ LOOP button select a file from the WAVE folder and press ENTER 3 Press the MP3 button select a file from the folder MP3 and press ENTER 4 Press the SFX button select a file from the folder SFX and press ENTER 5 Press the MIDI button select a file from the folder MIDIFILE and press ENTER In this way all the tracks will be playing simultaneously and you will be able to adjust the volume of eac
198. s For example select part 04 2 Press the F9 button MODE 3 Turn the DATA VALUE to set the value by selecting VOCAL Figure 163 4 Turn the button VOCALIZER on 5 To edit the MIDI MODE please see VOICETRON section later in this manual KETRON e AUDYA 65 GM Part B FILT TX RX USER 2 By pressing FILT TX you can access the window where to edit the MIDI transmission filters Figure 164 By pressing the button again you can access the window where to edit the MIDI reception filters To change the MIDI transmission reception parameters please see the MENU gt MIDI section B FILT TO ALL USER 3 By pressing FILT TO ALL you can set the filter to all ALL or to a single MIDI channel SINGLE BM 16 PARTS USER 4 By pressing 16 PARTS you can access the window where the status of the 16 parts appear divided into two windows of 8 parts each From each of the two windows you can change all the tracks parameters by using the F1 F10 buttons and the DATA VALUE wheel 1 Press the F1 or F6 buttons repeatedly to choose the Program Change of the part track In this way you see the 16 parts tracks of the MIDI file By using the CURSOR a gt buttons or the DATA VALUE or the VOICE buttons you can select the GM instrument for each part track Figure 165 2 Press the F2 or F7 buttons repeatealy to hilight one of the 16 parts tracks of the MIDI file By using the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons or the DATA VALUE you can set the
199. s This parameter is set correctly if the vocalizer synthesizes the same note as the singer in Melody mode and with harmony part muted In auto mode the vocalizer dynamically transposes the MIDI notes to the closest octave to the input signal C1 Harmony MIDI channel harmony MIDI channel HC After you use this command the harmony MIDI channel will change so you ll need to send all the following MIDI messages into the new channel Harmony and melody MIDI channels must be different if you try set the harmony channel at the current melody channel value the command will be ignored You must move the melody to another channel before sch O Lead MIDI channel lead voice MIDI channel LC After you use this command the lead voice MIDI channel will change so you ll need to send all the following MIDI messages to the new channel Harmony and melody MIDI channels must be different if you try set the melody channel at the current harmony channel value the command will be ignored You must change the harmony to another channel before 152 KETRON e AUDYA NRPN INRPN Data MSB Default Parameter MSB value 23 Virtual voice presets presets for Virtual voice feature Calling a preset overwrites the current Voice transform vibrato formant tone and EQ parameters of the lead voice Calling a preset also turns Lead channel processing switch NRPN 96 06 on automatically Presets are 0 Pop 1 Mellow 2 Teen
200. s Byte 2 Byte 3 BnH 05H ttH n LC 1 or HC 1 lead or harmony MIDI channel tt portamento time OOH 7FH default OOH B Volume Status Byte 2 Byte 3 BnH 07H wH n LC 1 or HC 1 lead or harmony MIDI channel vv volume OOH 7FH default 64H 100 B Pan Status Byte 2 Byte 3 BnH OAH ppH n LC 1 or HC 1 lead or harmony MIDI channel pp pan OOH 7FH default 40H 64 O full left 64 center 127 full right B Expression Status Byte 2 Byte 3 BnH OBH eeH n LC 1 or HC 1 lead or harmony MIDI channel ee expression 00H 7FH default 7FH B Portamento On Off Status Byte 2 Byte 3 BnH 41H ppH n LC 1 or HC 1 lead or harmony MIDI channel pp switch OOH off 01H 7FH on default OOH B Reverb Echo Send Level Status Byte 2 Byte 3 BnH 5BH rrH n LC 1 or HC 1 lead or harmony MIDI channel rr reverb echo send level OOH 7FH default 64H B Pitch Bend Change Status Byte 2 Byte 3 EnH IIH mmh n LC 1 or HC 1 lead or harmony MIDI channel II value LSB OOH 7FH default OOH mm value MSB OOH 7FH default 40H MSB LSB 00 00H 1 octave 40 00H no pitch bend 7F 7FH 1 octave KETRON e AUDYA 151 MIDI Implementation Vocalizer Non Registered Parameter Numbers Note All NRPN messages are to be sent through harmony or lead MIDI channels HC or LC B System NRPN NRPN NRPN Data MSB Default Parameter MSB LSB value Main volumes mnodesandswitthes
201. s and high frequencies boost User equalization set by the user LowCut By pressing the USER 2 button you can set a low cut equalization that is a high pass filter on sound Useful when you must cancel booming frequencies or to eliminate pop noises from the voice Figure 315 HighCut By pressing the USER 3 button you set a high cut equalization that is a low pass filter on sound Useful when you must cancel hissing frequencies or to eliminate feedback effects on the microphone Figure 316 Loudness By pressing the button USER 4 you set an equalization with bass and high frequencies boost Useful when in must enhance the frequencies in too absorbing rooms at too low volume Figure 317 In other words the natural loss at quite volumes of low and high frequencies by the human ear is compensated User By pressing the USER 5 button you set an equalization made by the user Useful when you must recall a particular equalization for different gigs Figure 318 The User Preset is stored together the Voicetron Preset as explained on the next page 110 KETRON e AUDYA Ou Qu Qu Qu UUCUOCUOU Io S KKK S oOo ENZX Sa Qu Qu Uo wo SIOEN BI m Sa SL ke go z a E 56005000 C0600 Figure 317 Eius 318 IQge uj Bi Te Bez Be Io Io Mj u j n j a as Voicetron EFFECTS By selecting the F9 button the list of E
202. shows the split point currently set on the keyboard Octave It shows the octave transpolf value for the right hand Fi The F1 button opens the window for style selection It shows also the value of the volume set from STYLE MASTER and the ABCD variation of the Arranger Figure 42 F2 The F2 button opens the window for the REGISTRATION selection Figure 43 More details in the REGISTRATION section of this manual 30 KETRON e AUDYA FT ret i Drum SC hord Lower ras Fal 4 Letia Start z O and Voice Oet A STRINGS1 Left Voice et 2 GRAND PIANO LY Right PIA ANC GRAND PIANO O9 l ae GRAND PIAN j maner LL Gei 54 lammi z g O z z Figure 42 a ld Ct GR AND Figure 43 JW B0 at Ta Main View F3 F4 The F3 button or F4 opens the default window for MIDI files selection It also shows lm the value of the volume set on the MIDI Player BC Figure 44 More details on MIDI Player K MAIN VIEW section of this manual WK F5 The F5 button does not open any window It ac indicates the MAIN VIEW section corresponding ji 1 to the mixer parts of the Arranger In this section I s Ix mm d uA S the volume values of Drum Bass Chord and e g s s s z g g Lower Figure 45 are displayed Pau 44 F6 The F6 button opens the window of VOICES selection for the right hand RIGHT I
203. split points for each VOICE playing directly on the keyboard For example 0 lower NOTE of the first VOICE 1 higher NOTE of the first VOICE 2 lower NOTE of the second VOICE 3 higher NOTE of the second VOICE 4 lower NOTE of the third VOICE G6 higher NOTE of the third VOICE FS F8 VELOCITY Figure 92 you can set the dynamic value for each VOICE values from 0 to 127 For example Minimum VELOCITY for the first VOICE 1 Maximum VELOCITY for the first VOICE 88 Minimum VELOCITY for the second VOICE 89 Maximum VELOCITY for the second VOICE 127 Minimum VELOCITY for the third VOICE 1 Maximum VELOCITY for the third VOICE 127 This means that if you play on the keyboard with a VELOCITY value dynamic value from 89 or above the first VOICE will stop playing while the second will play Instead the third VOICE will always play at any velocity value By pressing together the CURSOR buttons you can set the value to 1 in the odd VELOCITY boxes and to 127 in the even boxes e FA F9 SUSTAIN Figure 93 enable disable the sustain pedal for each VOICE e F5 F10 EXPR Figure 94 enable disable the expression control for each VOICE CONTROL 2 You can open a second control page from the CONTROL 1 page where you can modify further parameters of the PROGRAM By pressing the USER 5 button Control 2 from the CONTROL 1 page you will see a screen like Figure 95 Once you select a parameter you can modify the value b
204. st window by using the F1 F10 buttons or one of 10 of the second window accessible by using the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel 3 Press the EDIT button on the front panel A window like Figure 189 will appear 4 Press F1 KEY to select the percussive instrument to assign to the note played on the keyboard On our example is C1 of the KICK percussive group If you assign another percussive instrument press any other key on the keyboard Drum Set o u o BC Nie x i D TEE DI 0O OO OO OC 8 i Figure 185 E tJ u slal a La ji a Ch Figure 186 o GAASS Figure 187 HL mme un j ag pe See MC Go EE Lum m SL W Figure 188 St ER LJ m LJB ou E D o goO0ogo9 Figure 189 KETRON 0 AUDYA 1 Drum Set Press F2 GROUP if you want change the percussion group Figure 190 by using the CURSOR a gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel KICK SNARE HI HAT CYMBAL TOM RIMSHOT LATIN1 LATIN2 LATINS3 CLAP FX Press F3 INSTR to select an instrument within the percussion group by using the CURSOR lt q buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel In our example is kick18 Figure 191 By pressing the CURSOR gt buttons together you set empty that is no instrument Press F6 TUNE to set the fine tune of the percussive instrument by using the CURSOR lt gt buttons or the DATA VALUE
205. t taa ims PT ui come Te gesi cwm sen e m Ja ium A ame Emi HED AMEN d mm Lea Qu x HT rm j imer cnr ges 8 o m m zi qam 1 Uh tei JU een c _ oo D oo0gogO0cgo2O Figure 128 KETRON e AUDYA 53 Style View For any other part you can set the routing of the effects up to four effects Figure 129 By using the F1 button you can select the routing of the effects for the parts Please note that you select the part on the previous VOICE page USER 1 By using the F2 F3 F4 F5 buttons you select the effect type REVERB TYPE CHORUS TYPE ECHO TYPE DIST TYPE By rotating the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons you can set the effect types for each part By pressing the CURSOR a gt buttons together you set the first default effect By using the buttons from F7 F8 F9 and F10 you set the amount of the effect for the selected part By pressing the CURSOR a gt buttons together you set the amount to O B PAN USER 3 By pressing PAN you can edit the panoramic position of each part of the style Figure 130 by using the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons Please note that the PAN cannot be modified for the Audio Drum part B MUTE USER 4 By pressing MUTE you can mute the parts of the style by using the F1 F10 buttons The muted parts have an asterisk after the name Figure 131 Once you have set the MUTE parts in a style the parts remain mut
206. t also den tro mc oct shows the value of the volume set for the right ju GRAND PIANO hand and the type of VOICE such as PRESET r PROGRAM DRAWBARS or INSTRUMENT SUPERSOLO F7 The F7 button opens the window for VOICES selection for the 2ND VOICE It also shows the p value of the volume set for the 2ND VOICE and ES gum ia the octave shift set by PROGRAM If you select e z s s s z z z an instrument from the MAIN VIEW window the Figure 45 octave will be set to the standard 0 value and will appear tp c1 Ct F8 The F8 button opens the window for VOICES 4 tan TE up qme selection for the left hand LEFT VOICE It also RAT shows the value of the volume set for and octave 28 menn Ri shift Mi imn wa F9 The F9 button does not open any window F10 The F10 button opens the LYRIC window If no x ch MIDI file is selected or the MIDI file does not a EN ON OH CH EN 3 CH contain lyrics the LYRIC section of this window BT Wc D Ro X mo AOA will appear empty Figure 46 To return to the Figure 46 MAIN VIEW display press the F10 button again or any other button STYLE VOICES DRUM SET PROGRAM or Player button KETRON e AUDYA 31 Main View MIDI Player MAIN VIEW From the MAIN VIEW window you can select directly one of the MIDI files stored on disc and display the karaoke lyrics if present B Selecting MIDI files from MAIN VIEW 1 Inthe MAIN VIEW win
207. t20 40 Snare081 88 Snare077 89 Snare060 42 Stick13 90 Snare061 43 Tom08 44 Close 92 Kick09 45 Tom09 93 Middle06 94 Stick08 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tomi2 98bEmpt J 51 RideO1 igOEmpty 52 Crash03 100 Empty 53 RidebellO1 27 Slap 75 ClavesO1 54 TambourineO1 56 Cowbell01 58 Vibraslap 59 Ride03 60 Bongo_Hi 61 Bongo Low 109 Empt Acid Program Change 78 14 Snare001 62 Conga Slap 15 RollO1 63 Conga_Hi 16 Roll02 64 Conga Low 17 Snare002 65 Timbales_Hi 18 Snare003 66 Timbales Lo 19 Snare004 67 Agogo Hi 20 Snare005 68 Agogo Low 21 Snare006 69 Cabasa 22 Tom FlamO1 70 MaracasO01 23 Tom FlamO2 71 WhistleO1 72 WhistleO2 25 Snare007 73 Guiro01 26 Fingsnap 01 75 Claves01 28 Snare008 76 W Block Hi 29 Scratch Up 77 W Block Lo 30 Scratch Down 31 SticksO1 32 Click 80 TriangleO1 33 Metronome 01 81 TriandleO2 34 Metronome 02 82 ShakerO01 83 Shaker02 36 Kick27 84 SticksO2 37 Rimshot05 85 ClapO1 38 Snare059 86 Tambourine02 39 Clap07 87 RimshotO3 40 Snare077 88 Snare059 89 Snare031 42 Stick06 90 Snare034 43 Tom21 91 Kick17 44 StickO7 92 Kick15 45 Tom22 93 Middle05 46 Close06 94 Close04 47 Tom23 48 Tom24 96 Applause 49 Crash02 97 Belltree 50 Tom25 51 RideO1 52 Crash03 53 RidebellO1 54 TambourineO1 55 Crash04 56 CowbellO1 58 Vibraslap 59 Ride03 60 Bongo Hi 108 Empt Kick amp Snare Program Change 79 14 Empt 62 Kick33 15 Empt 63 Kick34 64 Kick53 un o 3 NO
208. th the CURSOR a gt buttons 5p e j m choosing between Main Stereo or 1 amp 2 Stereo eer a D is a ICI B METRONOME CLICK 5 n mo m mo Ms I ac e By pressing the F6 button from the main page of A 1 the MENU you can access to the METRONOME 2 f a EH CLICK screen where to make settings of the 2 z z z J d d z metronome Figure 271 By using the F1 F10 Figure 271 buttons you can set the following parameters F1 LINK MODE sets the metronome in the following environments Go fa uc All Style MIDI Wave MP3 ST Bee F2 RUN MODE sets the start mode of the wue m Jee gaz 3 metronome Free Start CE oon p Med F3 VOLUME output volume from 0 to 63 L ao Je Bo F4 OUTPUT output assign Figure 272 to Out 1 CJ a Gd Sao and 2 Out 3 and 4 Out 3 and 4 and headphones SA amp Hph In this last mode you will hear only a s g d s a O the metronome on the headphones Useful for i a drummers S 272 F5 TYPE click type CLICK METR 1 and METR 2 F6 TEMPO tempo setting This applies only if the songs don t have tempo information usually the WAV and MP3 files F TIME SIG sets the numerator of the division Values from 1 to 12 F8 TIME SIG sets the denominator of the division Values 4 or 8 Press the USER 1 button ACTIVE INACTIVE to By pressing the USER 1 button you can toggle the 1 amp 2 enable disable the METRONOME CLICK function as EE SOM DIO bie i den arrow on Figure 26
209. the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR A V Press the ENTER button to select the song The song will be automatically assigned to the C3 key of the keyboard Select another song and press the ENTER button The song will be automatically assigned to the C 3 key of the keyboard Continue assigning all the songs that you want to any key of the keyboard Figure 120 Press the USER 5 button SAVE to store the KEY TUNE Digit a name on the dialogue box by using the keys on the keyboard The example shows MY TUNE Press SAVE again At this point the KEY TUNE file named MY TUNE will appear on the screen Figure 121 To remove a song from a KEY TUNE press the USER 3 button REMOVE below the display KEY TUNE parameters When you create a KEY TUNE from scratch or edit a previous one you can set the following parameters by using the F1 F10 buttons F3 START the start note of the trigger interval e g C3 You can set this by pressing directly any keys on the keyboard F4 END the end note of the trigger interval e g F3 You can set this by pressing directly any keys on the keyboard F5 INC DEC you can set the automatic insertion of the trigger interval by increasing decreasing the note automatically For example if you begin from C3 and INC is set the next song is assigned to C Z3 If DEC Is set it the next song will be assigned to B2 F6 VOL sets the output volume of the song in the rang
210. the EXIT or MENU buttons Press SAVE and F6 CUSTOM STARTUP to store the language setting at Audya start up B MIDI e Press the F2 button MIDI to open the MIDI settings page Figure 208 By using the F1 F10 buttons you can access the following settings F1 CHANNEL TX transmission channels setting F2 FILTER PROG CHANGE TX Program Change transmission filter setting F3 TRANPOSE TX part transpose transmission F4 UTILITY utility page see more details later F6 CHANNEL RX reception channels setting F FILTER PROG CHANGE RX Program Change reception filter setting F8 TRANSPOSE Rx part transpose reception 76 KETRON e AUDYA Figure 206 7 ke Sg ge 9s me j E Cp RATUA BL OO ci D Qe E O CEO E Figure 207 NOTE Only the languages really present in the keyboard will appear Further languages will be updated by adding an ordinary text file loaded into the internal disc cu ez or Chama Te Chama Ex BD wegen sepezeer 8C a Trug TE Thar Ex i De pin ag Da xs e ac 6coO0o0co Figure 208 By pressing the cursor 4 gt buttons together you set the default value that is no MIDI channel It means that the part is not transmitted via MIDI CHANNEL TX By pressing the F1 button a window like Figure 209 will appear Here you can set all the MIDI transmission channels for each part of the keyboard by using the F1 F10 buttons Press the F1 but
211. the name of the instrument The USER 5 button enables disables the MANUAL DRUM function that is the manual playing of the drum directly from the keyboard Drum Remap The Drum Remap function has effect only on the MIDI drum So for the following example a MIDI style is chosen Kick remapping 1 Select the Soul Pop style from Rock user style category Figure 178 2 Press DRUM MIXER and press the USER 4 button Drum Remap as shown by the arrow on Figure 179 Start the style to listen immediately to the changes you make 3 Select the Variation A of the Arranger 4 Ifyou to remap the kick of the drum press F1 to select the first Drum Remap slot 5 Press the note corresponding to the kick of the style In our example is C1 6 The display will show the sound on that key Figure 180 Please note that the Drum Remap applies to the style and to each Variation A B C D So if you select the B Variation the Drum Remap screen will be empty In this way you have the possibility to remap all the Variations of the style independently Drum Mixer Deg 90000 O Figure 176 E SE n0 SP IEEE ln saos uJj Ip sam arme PU p Ip sem fua Je Log t S et ese et STEE ao E a E a T n F i uic maim cma un eO z z TET Figure 177 A RBOOONO A smion AA OAA BAPE o LJ A ONEUMERUS 7 aia wm T F ut c ors ke C DS hiki Lem ILI 000908 Ge
212. the sample Figure 335 By using the F1 F10 buttons you can access the following functions EL uh o en e F1 ATTACK sets the attack time of the envelope z z z C z z z F2 DECAY sets the decay time of the envelope Bars 334 F3 SUSTAIN sets the sustain level of the envelope F4 RELEASE sets the release time of the envelope F6 SLOPE sets the slope of the envelope F7 OFFSET sets the amount of the envelope Kik b ditai 8 i 2 xm ig i Fhap ra h Hara egy i i LJ m E Den en al Vom teg Catus rede EE 4 D LI urb Bgm L eege j ZH par Tua eee L baa bs BILL 2 accordingly to the dynamics Oa F8 FILT SLOPE sets the filter slope SI F9 FILT OFFSET sets the amount of offset on S n the filter accordingly to the dynamics 1 3 Load another WAV file assign it to another button s OOoOo0gOQ 5 and repeat editing san 4 When you select all the desired WAV files you Fun 335 can see the list of the files loaded into MSP by pressing the MSP VIEW button USER 2 button In this screen you can check the files out remove files USER 3 button and play a file by using the SOLO button USER 4 button This environment lets you ri edit the previously created MSP files By pressing the MSP VIEW button again you exit to the main window KETRON 0 AUDYA 115 MSP function B Saving and loading an MSP 1 When you finish editing save the MSP by using the USER 5 button SAVE Digit a name on t
213. this manual B Setting an Audio Drum Groove Bank or Live Guitar The selection of the tables for these three parts is the same This is the procedure to set an Audio Drum The procedure is the same for the other two parts With the Arranger stopped press the STYLE VIEW button 1 Press the F1 button 2 Wait please will appear briefly while reading the Audio Style from disc The part now is called Audio Drum 3 Turn the DATA VALUE wheel to scroll all the avail able tables or digit the number of the table by using the numeric keypad of the style section For exam ple digit 201 to select the Audio Drum called 16 BEAT6 72 Figure 133 4 Start the style by using the START button on the panel 5 To change the Audio Drum stop the Arranger and repeat from step 3 B Setting a Bass Bank or an Arp amp Lick The selection from the tables or sounds for these two parts is the same This is the procedure to set and edit a Bass Bank With the Arranger stopped press the STYLE VIEW button Press the F3 button 2 Wait please will appear briefly while reading the Bass Bank from disc The part now is called Bass Bank 3 Turn the DATA VALUE wheel to scroll all the avail able tables or digit the number of the table by using the numeric keypad of the style section For exam ple digit 55 to select the Bass Bank called PAN DERO1 Figure 134 4 Start the style by using the START button on the
214. to 63 By pressing together the CURSOR gt buttons together you set the effect DISTORTION send to 0 Figure 89 If you set an effect like DIST DIST CHO or DIST ECHO CHO in the EFF MODE page you cannot adjust the CHORUS ECHO and DISTORSOR sends independently for each voice The parameter adjustment of the effect send is common to all three voices so the adjustment of one effect send affects all the effect sends CONTROL 1 The USER 5 button opens a screen like Figure 90 where you can modify the parameters of the CONTROL 1 page You can access the parameters by using the F1 F10 buttons in order to program the VOICES in splits or dynamic layers on the keyboard Once you select the parameter you can modify the parameters by using the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons Use the function F1 F6 buttons to select one of three VOICES of the PROGRAM 42 KETRON e AUDYA M BS Le 00 aij dt m E C z z z s s z Figure 86 Qgau M Qu uQ ga 00 Ou Sao Goa aij dt dd M 4 EN z z s z z GI Figure 87 e C d st CH C C a Ui uiJ 00 AN GQ E z z s s z UJ Figure 88 Figure 90 e F1 F6 VOICES you can assign up to three VOICES to the same PROGRAM as already seen in the first PROGRAM EDIT screen e F2 F7 RANGE Figure 91 you can set the split points of the three instruments You can set the
215. ton KETRON 0 AUDYA 67 Drum Mixer Drum Mixer By pressing the DRUM MIXER button on the PLAY CONTROL section you can access the 10 percussive parts of the drum set Figure 172 By pressing the F1 F10 buttons you select the percussive parts of the drum F1 KICK F2 SNARE F3 HI HAT F4 CYMBAL F5 TOM F6 RIMSHOT F7 LATIN1 Latin percussion 1 F8 LATIN2 Latin percussion 2 F9 LATIN3 Latin percussion 3 F10 CLAP FX hands clap and effects When no USER 1 4 button is selected to deselect a button just press the button again you can MUTE the single percussive parts of the drum by using the F1 F10 buttons Figure 173 To UNMUTE a percussive part press the same F1 F10 button again The USER buttons from 1 a 4 let you modify the following items VOLUME REVERB PAN POT DRUM REMAP VOLUME USER 1 By pressing VOLUME you can set the volumes of the percussive parts of the drum by using the F1 F10 buttons and the DATA VALUE wheel or by using the CURSOR lt 4 gt gt buttons The available values are from 0 to 15 Figure 174 By pressing the CURSOR a gt buttons together you set the value to O REVERB USER 2 By pressing REVERB you can set the reverb sends of the single percussive parts of the drum by using the F1 F10 buttons and the DATA VALUE wheel or by using the CURSOR a gt buttons The available values are from 0 to 15 Figure 175 By pressing the CURSOR a gt buttons together you set the value t
216. ton 10 corresponding to the part and assign the MIDI transmission channel choosing from 1 to 16 by using the CURSOR gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel F1 Right F2 Left F3 Bass FA Drum F5 Drum2 F6 Global global channel of the keyboard F7 Registration F8 Voicetron F9 ARRANGER CHORDS opens another window F10 VOICE DRAWBAR opens another window Besides the F1 10 buttons you can also select the parts by using the CURSOR A V buttons ARRANGER CHORDS By pressing the F9 button an assign window for the MIDI channels will appear as shown in Figure 210 By pressing the F1 F10 buttons or the CURSOR A W buttons you can select the parts of the Arranger to which assign the transmission MIDI channel from 1 to 16 by using the CURSOR a gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel Fi Chord1 F2 Chord2 F3 Chorda3 F4 Chord4 F5 Chord5 F6 Lower1 F7 Lower2 F8 Live Chord L Mono F9 Live Chord R VOICE DRAWBAR By pressing the F10 button a window will appear where to assign the MIDI channels for each VOICE DRAWBAR Click and Percussion as shown in Figure 211 By pressing the F1 F10 buttons or the CURSOR A Y buttons you can select the parts to which assign the MIDI transmission channel from 1 to 16 by using the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel F1 Voice1 F2 Voice2 F3 Voice3 F4 2ndVoice1 F5 2ndVoice2 F6 GM RAM Voices F7 Drawbar F8 Click F9 Percussion ju Sa ga Sa Oa
217. ts USER DISTORTION When you select one of the five custom Distortion effects you can access the parameters of the corresponding effect by pressing the EDIT button on the front panel The Figure 243 shows the parameters for Over User1 but the parameters are identical for Over User 1 Dist User 2 Dist User 1 and Dist User 3 The only difference is the basic algorithm The parameters are the following F1 User Distortion choose from 1 to 5 F2 GAIN effect level values 0 63 F3 INPUT LEVEL input level values 0 63 F4 FILTER FREQ frequency filter cutoff values 0 63 F5 FILTER RESO filter resonance values 0 63 F OTUPUT LEVEL output volume values 0 63 F8 SUSTAIN sustain amount values 0 63 F9 TYPE algorithm type Tube Grunge Sharp Heavy Punk By pressing the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together you set the value to 0 After you set the parameters you can to store the custom Distortion by pressing the USER 5 button SAVE or the SAVE button on the front panel A brief message SAVE DATA TO DISK will appear 86 KETRON AUDYA 1 D gua Sa ju gu 0500goOotc Figure 241 A uw anu iw mme ww BIS a me JL ee mmus na Em win DEED iUum m T Gogg p Figure 243 ui Te 00 B0 Nec Ei Wi u aO Ce Wi DC ano Ce ROTOR By pressing the F5 button on the DSP page you can access the window ROTOR as shown in Figure 244
218. ts by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel Stereo Triplet TRANSFORM By selecting the F5 button a TRANSFORM screen only for MICRO1 like Figure 296 will appear where you can choose one of the available Transform effects by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel COMPRESSOR By selecting the F5 button a COMPRESSOR screen only for MICRO1 like Figure 297 will appear where you can choose one of the available compressors by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel 7U 2 B 5o ga Qu ES 990000 Figure 294 990000 Figure 295 900000 Figure 296 Figure 297 Voicetron Mj uc Ino Ch Ba e u oi ao BC 00 Ino Hj BC Sao KETRON 0 AUDYA 105 Voicetron LIMITER By selecting the F6 button a LIMITER screen only for MICRO1 like Figure 298 will appear where you can choose one of the available Limiters by using the CURSOR A V buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel EQUALIZER By selecting the F8 button an EQUALIZER screen only for MICRO1 like Figure 299 will appear where you can choose one of the equalization Presets by using the USER buttons from 1 to 5 or set the your equalization curve To change the equalization curve choose the band by using the CURSORE a gt and change the value 14 dB by using the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR A V buttons The Preset curves are the following lat USER 1
219. ts stand in the middle of the screen as PART 01 PART O2 up to PART 16 Please note that the F5 and F10 buttons set the MUTE and SOLO functions of the part respectively For each part you can change also the instrument Program Change rotating the DATA VALUE when no F1 F10 buttons is selected You can set a GM VOICE and a SUPERSOLO previously loaded into RAM To deselect a F1 F10 button just press the same button twice Transposition of the MIDI part 1 Select the part by pressing the CURSOR gt buttons For example select part 04 2 Press the F6 button SHIFT 3 Turn the DATA VALUE to set the value In Figure 162 the part is transposed by 12 semitones GM Part 7 U Wi EC ke BS Te JQ DCH Qu 0 Qu e o0ogogpO0ogooO0 7 Figure 161 LIS NL E Te Kaz WW vi Ti Figure 162 IR m YA e CELE is A MEN oe Liar E L em 28 4 a a e m Gu ge zm Uc m CJEM Zorn no EEUU E CH E Figure 163 Setting the VOCAL mode The melody part is usually on MIDI channel 4 so you can set the VOCALIZER effect by turning the DATA VALUE wheel When you select the VOCAL mode for the MIDI file part MIDI MODE appears in the middle of the screen Figure 163 At this point press the VOCALIZER button on the VOICETRON section and the MIDI file track will drive the channel of the voice making double voices and choir effects 1 Select the part by pressing the CURSOR button
220. u OC x E 000O0OCOQOO Os zz Fs Qu e m SCH Mac JU C Inc x x 3026658458 Figure 56 M Bi Te DC Sag Io 0909090009 Fuson Funk STAGE T dii HI BO 6 z z s J z Figure 59 Main View DJ LOOP Player MAIN VIEW From the MAIN VIEW window you can select directly the DJ LOOP files on disc MA mui B Selecting a DJ LOOP from MAIN VIEW DC 1 The default MAIN VIEW window allows the g selection of MIDI files For this reason it s anc necessary to press the DJ LOOP button of the Player A list of DJ LOOP of the folder DJ LOOP X os will appear Figure 60 z z z s s z z 2 Select a DJ LOOP from the list by using the Figure 60 CURSOR A Y buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel Our example is ArtOfSun djl dt tre Ire owt 3 Press the ENTER button for load the DJ LOOP rm DI into memory and the START button to start TELA u playback of the DJ LOOP 00 4 Press the USER 3 HOME button to activate the MAIN VIEW window as shown by the arrow of BA Figure 60 Io 5 By pressing the F3 button or F4 the MAIN VIEW a n A window will appear and on the right side the list Hoe oc Oo OQ o 9 CH of DJ LOOP Figure 61 In this way while the e gt r n o o current file is playing back you can select a file Figure 61 from the list using the CURSOR A W buttons or the DATA VALUE wheel and start with th ENTER button 6 The USER buttons from 1 to 4 in the MAI
221. uba N Cc 2 2 o Oo o CH Ge ND xe esch rench_Horn UI o N Oo ynbrass1 ynbrass2 CD 38 60 64 20 Positive i O1 O1 O1 O1 O1 O1 CO1 O1 5 S 3 2 I8 RRL OII AIOINI OO coO OOo H O O1 2 OO IO O cH rancaise ango ountry amp Slide Electric_Funk 6 M Pop_ 12Strings Solid Body War Ba Funk ass amp Guit2 recision ynbass3 O Q Ke 7 8 20 CD N VOICE 65 N nglish_Horn NS Clarinet Piccolo Classic Flute Recorder Pan Flute Bottle Shakuashi Whistle Ocarina Square Sawtooth Calliope 4 CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO O0 CO CO CO NIN ITNININ Rb Rb O IIco m N 01 gt COIN oO C2 NO 3 Sinesweep V Als D ORBE mE x T E OJO 3 D Wo O ol O oo 910 35 D ial F 8 Fm Lead Fantasy Warmpad score Space ftpad O 8 NO O1 8 Oo o D C D o lt D et m C1 SS elude weep CD lt N VOICE 39 CD ynbass4 ynbass5 trings2 iolas trings2 ctastring trings1 arcato rings3 ow_Strings rings2 ynstrings3 CD d CD Choir Aah1 Choir Aah2 Ooh Vocal Tuuh Golden geemz 2 7 Sounds N VOICE 97 lce Rain oundtrack ough Pad artheme tar njo hamisen oto et gJlolioiaiojiui ioliole fol Oo 2 S lo 51012 5 70 O 2 roli 5 o Q9
222. uency of the drum from 1030 Hz to 16130 Hz F8 BASS GAIN EQ adjusts the EQ low frequency gain by 12 dB F9 TREBLE GAIN EQ adjusts the EQ high frequency gain by 12 dB oe the DRUM parameters The parameters of LIVE DRUM Stretch and Pitch and the 2 bands parametric EQ for the audio drum can be saved as USER STYLE with any frequency FREQ and gain GAIN values Press the SAVE button on the front panel and give a name by using the keyboard or use the same style name as shown in Figure 152 by pressing the USER 5 button SAVE m DRUM 2 By pressing the USER 2 button twice DRUM turns off as shown by the arrow on Figure 153 you can access the AUTOCRASH parameters Figure 153 that is the automatic hit on the cymbals CRASH F1 AUTOCRASH INTRO the Autocrash function can be enabled disabled after the Intro of the style F2 AUTOCRASH FILL B the Autocrash function can be enabled disabled after the Fill In and the Break of the style NOTE The AUTOCRASH works only if present within the style If the Autocrash is not programmed into the style its two options have no effect 62 KETRON e AUDYA Oa Sa g u i 6 6 Leg mp papp HESE Furl E terse cad i mes mar Joelle mm ETT Nu ee kazi AA 0900500589 Figure 151 a e Bi Te Ino Ch LA i KE Oa ga Oa Qu Qu z s z z Figure 152 a EE Taa ui u j 00 SE GE 56
223. ues 50 990 Hz F3 TREBLE FREQ high frequency values 1030 16130 Hz F4 BASS GAIN bass gain values 12 dB F5 TREBLE GAIN high gain values 12 dB F VOICE ADJUST frequency adjustment for the vocal part reduction function values 1 300 See below Press the USER 1 button ACTIVE to enable the Wave Equalizer The USER 2 button DEFAULT resets the parameters to the default values By pressing the USER 3 button VOICE ON OFF as shown by the arrow on Figure 250 you can reduce the vocal part of the current WAVE file You can adjust the VOICE ADJIUST and the bass high gain parameters in order to reach the best result in the vocal reduction Press the F1 button LEAD MUTE when the WAVE Player is running Figure 251 to activate the vocal reduction function After you set the parameters you can to store the custom Wave Equalizer by pressing the USER 5 button SAVE or the SAVE button on the front panel A brief message SAVE DATA TO DISK will appear 2U SLE Sa go Oa a U KE 7 U gu Sa ju Ona oO oO J Y 9go Figure 249 puxrwg ms wera m Tat mp mees et cam dam nm cs om e ini HIE T oOogoo Figure 250 90000 Figure 251 KETRON 0 AUDYA 89 ids Hi ag BO ao ui DC B0 n iv m KEYBOARD CONTROL e From the first MENU screen by pressing the F4 button you can access the KEYBOARD CONTROL p
224. uiJj W 50900999 SL Ki Ja JEI ou E sonas vull u I c a 00909909 ISL E 2 B n Qu H a 000O0000 Kou E Drum Set By pressing the DRUM SET button in the PLAY CONTROL section you can access the screen where to select one of the available 53 DRUM SETS plus 20 user sets Figure 185 By pressing the F1 F10 buttons you select the DRUM SET while the CURSOR a gt or the BACK and FORWARD buttons below the display allow to access the various pages of the DRUM SET The USER 1 5 buttons will show the corresponding edit pages INTERNAL USER INS FUNCTION FULL RANGE B INTERNAL USER 1 By selecting INTERNAL default selection you can set the DRUM SET among the 53 internal drum sets B USER USER 2 By selecting USER you can access the screen where to select edit the 20 DRUM SET created by the user Figure 186 B INS USER 3 By selecting INS you can DRUM SET loaded into RAM B FUNCTION USER 4 By selecting FUNCTION you can access the screen where to set the button SHIFT function which shift the DRUM SET in the range of 24 semitones in 12 semitones steps Figure 187 B FULL RANGE USER 5 By selecting FULL RANGE you can put the DRUM SET on the entire keyboard or on the left split SPLITTED Creating or editing a user DRUM SET 1 Press the USER 2 button USER to enter the user DRUM SET editing window Figure 188 2 Select one of the 10 USER DRUM of the fir
225. ulti page system based on function buttons around the display allow an easy navigation in the menus and the settings pages KETRON e AUDYA D Top panel The front panel of Audya is divided in various operative sections In the figure below each number corresponds to its description Some buttons and controls on the front panel are marked by a blue serigraphy meaning that a second function is available accordingly to the selected operative mode QD Pitch This wheel changes the pitch of the sound currently selected for the right hand The default value is 2 semitones modifiable from MENU 2 Modulation This wheel changes the modulation of the sound currently selected for the right hand The default value of sensitivity is 14 modifiable from MENU 3 Play Control Section for the main controls on sound Transposer Octave Rotor etc see on page 18 4 User Arranger Voices Mixer section for the Arranger parts the right left hand the Style etc In DRAWBARS mode you can control the Drawbars parameters see on page 16 5 Function
226. us has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate nor mally or has been dropped IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS e Do not expose this apparatus to drips or splashes e Do not place any objects filled with liquids such as vases on the apparatus e Do not install this apparatus in a confined space such as a book case or similar unit e The apparatus should be located close enough to the AC outlet so that you can easily grasp the power cord plug at any time e The main plug is used as the disconnect device the disconnect device shall remain readily operable For European Users Disposal of old appliance 1 When this crossed out wheeled bin symbol is attached to a product it means the product is covered by the European Directive 2002 96 EC Playing the DEMO songs 1 Press the REGISTRATION and PLAY LIST buttons simultaneously 2 By using the buttons from F1 to F10 to the right and to left of the display select one of the 10 demo songs displayed on the current page 3 By using the DATA VALUE wheel you can scroll various pages of demo songs 4 Usethe START STOP button for start or stop the playback of the current song 5 Press either the REGISTRATION or the PLAY LIST buttons to exit the DEMO mode An apparatus with Class construction shall be connect ed to an AC outlet with a protective grounding connec tion Excessive sound pressure from earphones and head phones can cause hearing loss The appar
227. with the wording MORPHING in blue You can set the MORPHING effect between two or three VOICES by changing the MODES to MORPHING or MORPH COUPLING see below e F4 MODES by using this parameter you can choose the interaction modes between the VOICES For example if you select MORPHING you can move the Modulation Wheel and the sound of the FIRST VOICE will morph gradually to the SECOND VOICE If the parameter is set to NORMAL no MORPHING will be applied to that VOICE Further interaction parameters between the VOICES are 3 Voice Layer Duet 1 Duet 2 F9 HARMONY Figure 98 you can set the harmonization type choosing from th following parameters 44 KETRON e AUDYA ui Wui j DI Soo oocoO0oo0 0 Figure 96 0999089989 Figure 97 Ou as n j u Sieg S Le at Less RI Ho HESE Haen m gm 00 go Oa rs 00O0gdoOoOcoOO km Figure 98 Duett 2 mode When you select DUET you can set one VOICE to FIRST and the other to SECOND If you play one single note only the VOICE set to FIRST will sound while the SECOND will sound only if you play two or more notes 1 2 changes the speed of playing notes Trio1 2 mode As above but with three notes Steel mode It s a particular Pitch Bend control on the voices The Pitch Bend acts only on the lower played note Double and 2 Hands mode They are the copy of the Double and Harmony 2 Hands buttons on the panel B
228. work well within the range of 30 96 of the nominal speed shown for the Audio style A 2 bands parameters equalizer setting can be stored for each Audio Drum style Menu Style Mode Drum The Library contains more than 300 Audio Drum see list at the end of this manual When a style with Audio Drum is running the Wave player is not available 2 Groove Bank The Grooves are short rhythmic sequences loops synchronized by using MIDI and controlled in the same way of Drum Sets with individual controls for volume reverb pan etc The Groove Library contains more than 200 loops with acoustic traditional percussions Latin and dance percussions The Grooves work in the Drum2 section and they always replace the Drum Set if present The Grooves can be stored on the 4 arrangements of the style with its own volume each 3 Bass Bank The automatic Bass MIDI Library offers more than 180 bass riffs It works on the Bass section replacing the normal bass part of the style 4 Arp amp Lick The Arpeggio amp Lick Library offers a variety of em bellishment for various instruments Piano Guitar 56 KETRON e AUDYA Strings Synth Banjo It works in place of the Chord 4 of the Style You can store 4 Arp amp Lick for any A B C and D part 5 Live Guitar The Live Guitar are audio guitar sequences controlled and synchronized by using MIDI To scroll the parts please refer to the lists at the end of
229. y recalling one VOICE you can automatically activate the functions stored in the VOICE F5 SPLIT 12 ON OFF Figure 99 you can enable disable the SPLIT to 12 semitones function That is when SPLIT mode is set the RIGHT hand will sound a 1 octave instead when PIANIST mode is set the keyboard will sound the original octave F10 AFTER WHEELS opens a further edit window for the Aftertouch and of Modulation Wheel parameters AFTER WHEELS From the AFTER WHEELS window you can modify the parameters using the F1 F10 buttons Once you have selected the parameter the value can be modified by using the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons F1 F6 VOICES you can assign up to three VOICES to the same PROGRAM as already seen in the first PROGRAM EDIT screen F2 F7 AFTERT Figure 100 you can assign an Aftertouch control to each instrument If stored in the PROGRAM and then enabled in Aft amp Port Autoswitch Menu gt Keyboard Control gt Aftertouch you can activate it from the button on the front panel For example Pitch1 Pitch2 changes the pitch Filter changes the filter Amplitude changes the amplitude Cutoff changes the cutoff of the filter Pit Cutoff changes pitch and cutoff Pitch Filt changes pitch and filter Pitch Ampl changes pitch and amplitude Pit Filt Amp changes pitch filter and amplitude Pi Fit Am Cut changes pitch filter amplitude and cutoff Slide 1 Slide 2 Slide 3 Sl
230. y using the DATA VALUE wheel or the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons Press the USER 5 button Control 1 again to return to the CONTROL 1 page You can choose the the parameters by using the F1 F10 buttons Program Man 95 KETRON 0 AUDYA 43 ui e Je Bo k s is Ta ui 00 B ac Ch HI uc aa Program e F1 F6 VOICES you can assign up to three VOICES to the same PROGRAM as already seen in the first PROGRAM EDIT screen F2 F7 PORT MONO Figure 96 you can set the PORTAMENTO time with choosing values from 5 to 127 By pressing the CURSOR lt 4 gt buttons together you set the value to OFF When the portamento is OFF you can set the MONO or POLY mode for the VOICE When you set the portamento to any value between 5 and 127 the portamento can be set to LEGATO or POLY on the first case the portamento acts on the sound in legato mode until a note is released In the second case it acts in polyphonic manner retriggering the portamento every time a note is played If the PORTAMENTO effect is stored in one PROGRAM and enabled by the Aft amp Port Autoswitch parameter Menu Keyboard Control gt Aftertouch you can activate it from the button on the front panel FS F8 MORPHING Figure 97 you can set the Morphing modes from one VOICE to another choosing one of the NORMAL FIRST and SECOND parameters The MORPHING will affect the sound by moving the Modulation Wheel
231. y using the cart stand tripod bracket or SE EE table specified by the manufacturer or sold by using A Follow all instructions the apparatus When a cart is used use caution when moving the cart apparatus combination to avoid injury 5 Do not use this apparatus near water from tip over 6 Clean only with dry cloth 7 Do not block any ventilation openings Install in accordance by using the manufacturer s instructions 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other apparatus including amplifiers that produce heat 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades l with one wider than the other A grounding type plug 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide unused for long periods of time blade Opine third prong are provided for your safety If 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult Servicing is required when the apparatus has been an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet damaged in any way such as power supply cord or 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects pinched particularly at plugs convenience recepta cles and the point where they exit from the apparatus 2 KETRON e AUDYA have fallen into the apparatus the apparat
232. ya lets you to save two types of Registrations SINGLE and BLOCK By using the REGISTRATION button on the front panel you can enter the Registration functions B Creating a SINGLE REGISTRATION 1 Press the REGISTRATION button to open a screen like Figure 103 Some demo REGISTRATION files will appear In the example 0001_REGIS SRG If not selected press the USER 5 button in order to select the SINGLE option Press the SAVE button to give a name to the REGISTRATION Digit a name in the text box by inputting the characters directly from the keyboard In Figure 104 the example is MY_REGISTRATION If you want to enable disable one or more sections press the USER 1 button SECTION OFF You can enable the sections SECTION ON by pressing the F1 F10 buttons as shown in Figure 105 You can enable disable the following sections F1 AUTOPLAY enables disables the autoplay function of the Player F2 PLAYER remembers the current folder of the Player F3 PLAYLIST enables the active Play List when you save the registration F4 TEXT stores the active text F5 STYLE stores the style F6 TEMPO stores the tempo F7 ARRANGER VARIATION stores the variation of the Arranger A B C D F8 ARRANGER MODES stores the Arranger settings F9 RIGHT LEFT stores the right hand and left hand settings F10 SLIDERS stores the slider settings By pressing the USER 1 button Section pg 1 you can enter the second secti

Engelsk komplett manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents